Panasonic KX-TDA 150 Hybrid IP-PBX PC Programming Manual
Below you will find brief information for Hybrid IP-PBX KX-TDA150. The KX-TDA150 Hybrid IP-PBX is a powerful and versatile system that can be customized to meet the needs of a wide range of businesses. It offers features such as voicemail, call forwarding, call transfer, and many more, making it an ideal solution for businesses of all sizes.
Advertisement
Advertisement
PC Programming Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Model No.
KX-TDA150
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TDA150: PDMPR Software File Version 5.1000 or later
Introduction
Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
Hybrid IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the Maintenance Console software.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:
Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
Section 2, Introduction of Maintenance Console
Explains the layout and menus of the Maintenance Console.
Sections 3 – 13, Maintenance Console Operating Instructions
Serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the
PBX.
Section 14, Appendix
Provides a list of all related PC programming items for each feature, as Feature Programming References.
References Found in the PC Programming Manual
Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.
Feature Guide References
The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities. Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Installation Manual References
The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
•
Installation Manual References
•
PC Programming Manual References
•
Feature Guide References
Safety Notices
Please observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and prevent damage to property.
The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:
WARNING
This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.
2 PC Programming Manual
Introduction
CAUTION
This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property.
WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise.
These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.
CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.
Notice
1.
During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
SD Memory Card, it can be easily restored.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.
2.
Maintenance Console cannot be used to program the PBX when the PBX is being powered by the backup batteries (for example, during a power cut). This is to prevent damage to the SD Memory Card that may occur if the backup battery power runs out while data is being written to the card.
3.
The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX.
To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the PBX.
Trademarks
•
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
•
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
•
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
NOTES
•
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.7.1 Frequently Asked
•
Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
•
Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
In some cases, additional information, including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the
Maintenance Console’s Information before programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance
Console to view this information.
•
In this manual, model number suffixes (e.g., KX-TDA150BR) are omitted unless necessary.
PC Programming Manual 3
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ..................................................19
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording ...............................................50
Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage .............................................51
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.6.7
2.5.9
2.5.10
2.5.11
Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level ...........................................58
2.6
4 PC Programming Manual
Table of Contents
2.6.8
2.6.9
2.6.10
2.6.11
2.6.12
2.6.13
2.6.14
2.6.15
2.6.16
2.6.17
2.7
2.7.1
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command ........................109
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View ....................................110
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command ................................113
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command .................................134
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command ...................................173
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command ...................................194
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command .....................................215
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting .........................................225
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 ............................................233
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 ............................................239
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command ....................................256
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command ...................................273
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command ...................................286
[1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command ..............................291
[1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings ..................................296
[1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command ....................................................309
PC Programming Manual 5
Table of Contents
3.42
3.43
3.44
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
[2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting .........................................326
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26
5.27
5.28
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
[3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ......................................475
[3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List .............491
[3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table ..............................493
[3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous ........................................494
[3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List ...............................................502
[3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List ........................................516
6 PC Programming Manual
Table of Contents
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
[4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................572
[4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................598
[4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate ................................635
[4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy ....................657
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
PC Programming Manual 7
Table of Contents
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
12 [10] CO & Incoming Call ......................................................................757
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
13.1
13.2
13.3
14.1
8 PC Programming Manual
Section 1
Overview
This section provides an overview of programming the
PBX.
PC Programming Manual 9
1.1.1 Introduction
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Only one person can perform system programming at a time. Any other users trying to enter programming mode will be denied access.
Ways to Programme
There are two programming methods:
•
PC (Personal Computer) Programming
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with Maintenance
Console. Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1.2 PC Programming.
Individual PC programming items are described in Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console.
•
PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
A subset of the features and settings of the PBX can be programmed using a PT. PT programming is described in the PT Programming Manual.
10 PC Programming Manual
1.1.2 Entering Characters
1.1.2 Entering Characters
The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.
Table 1 (Standard)
PC Programming Manual 11
1.1.2 Entering Characters
Table 2 (For CE model)
12 PC Programming Manual
Table 3 (For RU model)
1.1.2 Entering Characters
PC Programming Manual 13
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
1.2 PC Programming
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance
Console.
This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected by USB cable.
System Requirements
Required Operating System
•
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP, Windows Vista
®
Business, or Windows 7 Professional operating system
Minimum Hardware Requirements
•
HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
Recommended Display Settings
•
Screen resolution: XGA (1024
´ 768)
•
DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Installing the Maintenance Console
Note
•
To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group.
•
To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business or Windows 7 Professional, you must be logged in as a user in the "Administrators" group.
•
To connect the PC to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver. When the PBX is first connected to the PC via USB, you may be asked to select the appropriate USB driver. Browse for and select the KX-TDA
USB driver that was installed previously.
1.
Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC.
2.
Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.
Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick
Setup)
When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick Setup will launch automatically. During
Quick Setup, you will set up the following basic items:
•
Date and Time of the PBX. The date and time set to the PC’s clock will be used.
•
System Password for installer for PC programming.
•
Operator and manager settings. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/break/night) can be assigned.
•
Flexible Numbering plan to Type 1 or Type 2. If Type 1 (with ) is selected, " " must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a feature.
•
Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers.
•
Signal type used to dial out to analogue trunks through LCOT/CLCOT cards; DTMF or Pulse.
14 PC Programming Manual
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
1.
Connect the PC to the PBX with a USB cable.
2.
Start the Maintenance Console from the Start menu.
3.
"Information before programming" appears.
4.
a.
Carefully read this important additional information, which includes updates to this and other manuals.
b.
Click OK to close this window.
a.
Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default:
INSTALLER).
The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code.
Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator Level (default:
ADMIN), and User Level (default: USER). (
®
b.
Click OK.
5.
Click Connect.
6.
7.
a.
Select your PBX model from PBX Model.
Note
•
The appropriate PBX model is KX-TDA150 or
KX-TDA100D.
•
Depending on the type of Maintenance
Console used, you may not be required to select a PBX model.
b.
Select the USB tab.
c.
Enter the system password for installer (default:
1234).
d.
Click Connect.
Note
To connect to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed on the PC, as explained above
in "Installing the Maintenance Console".
When country/area data do not match: a.
Click OK to replace the country/area data of the PBX.
Replacement may take several minutes to complete.
b.
Follow the procedure described in Section
2.11.1 Starting the PBX in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX.
c.
Repeat step 5 to reconnect the Maintenance Console to the PBX.
PC Programming Manual 15
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
8.
Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard and assign the basic items.
The system menu appears. You may now begin programming the PBX.
16 PC Programming Manual
1.2.2 Password Security
1.2.2 Password Security
To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the
PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:
Password Description Format
System Password for User Used with the user-level programmer code to access user-level PC programming. The installer can specify which system programming settings are available.
System Password for
Administrator
Used with the administrator-level programmer code to access administrator-level PC programming. The installer can specify which system programming settings are available.
System Password for
Installer
Used with the installer-level programmer code to access installer-level PC programming. All system programming settings are available.
4 – 10 characters
The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console. For more
information about programmer codes, see 2.1.2 Access Levels.
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1.
Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2.
To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to others.
3.
The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you programme the PBX.
4.
Change the passwords periodically.
5.
It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, see 1.1.2 Entering Characters.
PC Programming Manual 17
1.2.2 Password Security
18 PC Programming Manual
Section 2
Introduction of Maintenance Console
This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX.
PC Programming Manual 19
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialogue box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the
2 available software modes.
•
Batch mode
Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. When you connect to the PBX, the modified data will be uploaded at one time.
•
Interactive mode
Interactive mode allows you to directly modify the system data and settings stored in the PBX’s memory from a PC that is connected to the PBX. This mode displays the system data that is currently being used by the PBX, rather than the system data stored on the SD memory card. Data can be modified and results displayed in real time.
To start Maintenance Console in Batch mode
1.
Enter the relevant programmer code.
2.
Click OK.
The start menu will appear.
3.
Select an option.
•
Select New to create a new system data file.
•
Select Open to open an existing system data file.
To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode
1.
Enter the relevant programmer code.
2.
Click OK.
The start menu will appear.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection options will be displayed.
•
Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•
To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and select the method of connecting to the
PBX.
Note
•
The appropriate PBX model is KX-TDA150 or KX-TDA100D.
•
Depending on the type of Maintenance Console used, you may not be required to select a PBX model.
a.
Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the tables below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
4.
Click Connect.
Maintenance Console will start, and automatically connect to the PBX. If this is the first time that
Maintenance Console has connected to the PBX, and the date and time of the PBX have not yet been set,
the Basic Items (Quick Setup).
20 PC Programming Manual
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Connection Settings for RS-232C
Setting
Port
Baud Rate (bps)
Values
COMx
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Explanation
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s
RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are displayed.
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Connection Settings for Modem
Setting
Dial Number
Values
1-9, 0, *, #, -, "," [comma], T, P,
W
Dial Type
Comment
Port
Baud Rate (bps)
Modem Initialise
Auto(Tone), Auto(Pulse),
Manual
Max. 40 characters
COMx
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
–
Explanation
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from
Pulse to Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Specify the outgoing dialling method.
If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with a connected telephone.
Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Enter the modem initialise command, and click Initialise to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s instruction manual.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting Values
IP Address 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Explanation
Specify the IP address of the
PBX on the LAN. Enter the same
IP address that was input in IP
PC Programming Manual 21
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes
Setting
Port Number
Values
10000–65535
Explanation
Specify the port number used to access the PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that was input in Maintenance Port
Connection Setting for ISDN Remote
Setting Values
Dial Number 30 digits (consisting of 1-9, 0, *,
#, -, and "," [comma])
Explanation
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX.
22 PC Programming Manual
2.1.2 Access Levels
2.1.2 Access Levels
There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows:
Item Length
User Level Programmer Code
Administrator Level Programmer Code
Installer Level Programmer Code
0 – 16 characters
4 – 16 characters
4 – 16 characters
Access to menu options within the Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the Programmer Code,
and the current software mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes). When a
menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that menu option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."
If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading, the menu option is available at all levels.
The target users for each access level are as follows:
Access Level User
User
Administrator
Installer
For end users
For system administrators
For dealers and system installers
The options available in each mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator; I: Installer
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.
Start Menu
Menu Option
Batch Interactive
New
Open
Connect—RS-232C
Connect—USB
Connect—LAN
Connect—Modem
Connect—ISDN Remote
Connect—Profile Setup
U A I U A I
ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
PC Programming Manual 23
2.1.2 Access Levels
File
Close
Save
Save As
Exit
Disconnect
Disconnect
Tool
Menu Option
Menu Option
Menu Option
SD memory backup
BRI Automatic Configuration
NDSS Link Data Clear
DXDP All OUS
Simplified Voice Message
®Delete All Recording
Simplified Voice Message
®Check Current Usage
Call Pickup for My Group
Extension List View
Import
®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Import
®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table
Import
®ARS - Leading Digit
Import
®ARS - Except Code
Import
®ARS - Routing Plan
Import
®Wired Extension
Import
®PS Extension
Import
®Quick Dial (Basic)
Import
®Quick Dial (Expansion)
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
ü ü ü
ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
24 PC Programming Manual
Menu Option
Export
®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Export
®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table
Export
®ARS - Leading Digit
Export
®ARS - Except Code
Export
®ARS - Routing Plan
Export
®Wired Extension
Export
®PS Extension
Export
®Quick Dial (Basic)
Export
®Quick Dial (Expansion)
Screen Customize
®User Level
Screen Customize
®Administrator Level
Utility
Menu Option
Diagnosis
File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
SD Card File View and Load
SD Card File Delete
Message File Transfer PC to PBX
Message File Transfer PBX to PC
Error Log
T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
T1/E1 Line Trace
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
Digital Trunk Error Report
IP Extension Statistical Information
CS Information
PS Information
Timed Update
2.1.2 Access Levels
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü ü ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
PC Programming Manual 25
2.1.2 Access Levels
Menu Option
System Reset
®Reset by the Command
View
Menu Option
Toolbar
Statusbar
System Menu
Window
Menu Option
Cascade
Tile(Horz)
Tile(Vert)
Help
Menu Option
Help
Additional Information
About
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
Batch
Interactiv e
U A I U A I
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü ü ü ü ü ü
26 PC Programming Manual
2.1.3 Software Interface
2.1.3 Software Interface
This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.
Main Window
The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below:
1 2 3
4 5 6
1.
Menu Bar
Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX.
For details, see Sections 2.3 File to 2.7 Help.
2.
Tool Bar
Provides easy access to commonly used software functions.
Two tool bars are provided, as follows:
•
File
Contains icons for saving files. For details, see Section 2.3.2 File—Save.
PC Programming Manual 27
2.1.3 Software Interface
•
Tools
Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and
accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.8 Tool
These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main window if released there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the tool bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Toolbar from the View menu.
3.
Tab Bar
The name of each screen currently open is displayed in a tab in this tab bar. When multiple screens are open at the same time, click on the tab of a screen to display the options associated with that screen.
4.
System Menu
Provides access to the settings used for programming the PBX, grouped into 11 topics.
For details, see Sections Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
To display the individual screens within a topic, click the topic heading. It will expand to show the sub-topics.
•
If a sub-topic contains more than one screen, clicking the name of the sub-topic will display the names of individual screens. Clicking an expanded sub-topic will hide the names of individual screens.
Double-click on a screen name to open that screen in 6. Main Screen below.
This menu can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position.
It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there.
Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the system menu is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting System Menu from the View menu.
5.
Status Bar
The status bar displays information on the current state of the Maintenance Console.
Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Statusbar from the View menu.
The information displayed is as follows, in order from left to right:
Area
Program Mode
PBX Type
Access Level
PBX System Data
Version
PBX Region Code
Values
Batch Mode xxx
Interactive Mode
TDA150
Level :
User
Administrator
Installer
Versionxxx-xxx
Regionxxx-xxx
Description
See 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and
"xxx" is replaced by the name of the current system data file.
Displays the type of PBX being programmed.
Displays the current access level, determined by the Programmer Code entered when starting
Maintenance Console. See 2.1.2 Access
Displays the version number of the system software installed to the PBX.
The first 3 digits are the version number, and the last 3 digits are the revision number.
Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and
Maintenance Console.
The first 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the PBX, and the last 3 digits represent the region code assigned to the
Maintenance Console.
6.
Main Screen
28 PC Programming Manual
2.1.3 Software Interface
Displays the screens selected from 4. System Menu above.
For details, see Sections Section 3 [1] Configuration to Section 13 [11] Maintenance.
Standard Buttons and Elements
There are several standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:
Button Function
OK
Cancel
Close
Apply
Refresh
Help
Implements changes and closes the current screen.
Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen.
Keeps any changes implemented, and closes the current screen.
Implements changes and remains on the same screen.
Implements changes, updates displayed data, and remains on the current screen.
Displays the relevant help topic for the current screen.
In addition, many screens within the software display a small open folder icon ( ) beside lists of setting items.
Clicking this icon will collapse part of the list, allowing other items to be displayed. The icon will change to a closed folder ( ).
Clicking the closed folder icon will expand the list again.
PC Programming Manual 29
2.1.4 Card Status
2.1.4 Card Status
Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card
status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting
Maintenance Console and Software Modes).
•
"In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
•
"Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
•
"Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card
(Interactive mode only) on screen 3.1 [1-1] Slot.
30 PC Programming Manual
2.1.5 Display Options
2.1.5 Display Options
The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console.
•
View
–
Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons.
–
Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window.
–
System Menu: Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens.
•
Window
–
Cascade: When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens overlapped, with the title bars visible.
–
Tile(Horz): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens side by side.
–
Tile(Vert): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens vertically.
PC Programming Manual 31
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting
Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this
Extension Number Setting window.
To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you wish to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be added to the first free spaces on the original screen.
Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in
Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items
can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.
Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, VM Group(DPT), VM Group(DTMF), ICD Group, PS Ring Group,
OGM(DISA), External Pager, Analogue MODEM, ISDN Remote
Extension Numbers & Names List
them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it again.
Value Range
Matching extensions
Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension numbers and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name data not be transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.
Value Range
Available fields
Selected Extension List
Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an extension from this list, click it to select it and click Delete.
Value Range
Selected extensions
32 PC Programming Manual
2.2.1 Start Menu—New
2.2 Start Menu
2.2.1 Start Menu—New
Creates a new system data file, used to programme the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or default state.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all previous settings. Use only when necessary.
To create a new system data file
1.
From the start menu, select New.
2.
Click the appropriate model number.
Note
•
The appropriate PBX model is KX-TDA150 or KX-TDA100D.
•
Depending on the type of Maintenance Console used, you may not be required to select a PBX model.
3.
Click OK.
PC Programming Manual 33
2.2.2 Start Menu—Open
2.2.2 Start Menu—Open
Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode.
When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.
If the file is not supported by the PBX (e.g. a system data file from an incompatible PBX), it will not be opened.
The only files that can be opened are files that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX.
To open a system data file
1.
From the start menu, select Open.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
2.
Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3.
Select the file.
4.
Click Open.
If the file was created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked if you want to convert the data.
•
Click Yes to convert the data for use with the current version of the Maintenance Console. Enter a name for the new converted system file.
•
Click No to open the file as it is.
34 PC Programming Manual
2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C
2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile
Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by RS-232C
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
•
Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•
To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the RS-232C radio button is selected.
a.
Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection Settings for RS-232C
Setting
Port
Baud Rate (bps)
Values
COMx
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200
Explanation
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s RS-232C interface.
Only available COM ports are displayed.
Specify the speed of data transmission.
PC Programming Manual 35
2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB
2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB Module) attached to a DPT.
To connect to the PBX by USB
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
•
Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•
To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the USB radio button is selected.
a.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
36 PC Programming Manual
2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN
2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX.
A CTI-LINK card must be installed and the IP address of the PBX set to use this feature. For more details, see
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile
Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by LAN
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
•
Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•
To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the LAN radio button is selected.
a.
Specify the connection parameters as required. For more details, see the table below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection Settings for LAN
Setting
IP Address
Port Number
Values
1.0.0.0–
223.255.255.255
10000–65535
Explanation
Specify the IP address of the PBX on the
LAN. Enter the same IP address that was
input in IP Address of 3.41 [1-1] Slot—
Specify the port number used to access the
PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number
Number of 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card
PC Programming Manual 37
2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem
2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem.
To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—Analogue
Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 13.1 [11-1] Main.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile
Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by Modem
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
•
Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•
To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the Modem radio button is selected.
a.
Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection Settings for Modem
Setting
Dial Number
Values
1-9, 0, *, #, -,
"," [comma], T, P, W
Dial Type
Comment
Port
Baud Rate (bps)
Modem Initialise
Auto(Tone),
Auto(Pulse), Manual
Max. 40 characters
COMx
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
–
Description
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX.
T: Converts the Dial Type from Pulse to
Tone.
"," [comma], P, W: Inserts a pause.
Specify the outgoing dialling method.
If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with a connected telephone.
Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Specify the speed of data transmission.
Enter the modem initialise command, and click Initialise to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem’s instruction manual.
38 PC Programming Manual
2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—ISDN Remote
2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—ISDN Remote
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode using the ISDN TA interface of the PBX.
This method is only available when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI 2.0 is used, and
—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number of the 13.1 [11-1] Main screen is set.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and
would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile
Setup for more details about creating profiles.
To connect to the PBX by ISDN Remote
1.
From the start menu, select Connect.
The Login window will be displayed.
2.
Select a connection option.
•
Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a.
Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b.
If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be entered.
•
To enter the parameters manually, select the PBX Model and confirm that the ISDN Remote radio button is selected.
a.
Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
b.
Enter the system password for the PBX.
3.
Click Connect.
Connection Setting for ISDN Remote
Setting
Dial Number
Values
30 digits (consisting of
1-9, 0, *, #, -, and
"," [comma])
Explanation
Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX.
PC Programming Manual 39
2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup
2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup
Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for several PBXs. Then, when you wish to connect to a specific PBX, you can simply choose that PBX’s profile from the list.
Note
When reinstalling or upgrading the Maintenance Console, it is possible to create a backup of all profiles.
This allows you to use the original connection settings with the new Maintenance Console.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
Button Function
Profile File
Save current profile
Save as new profile
Delete profile
Opens or saves profiles as separate files.
Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile already exists. A confirmation message will be displayed.
Saves the current settings as a new profile. A Profile Name is required.
When an existing profile is selected, deletes that profile. A confirmation message will be displayed.
40 PC Programming Manual
2.3.1 File—Close
2.3 File
2.3.1 File—Close
Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the start menu.
To close a system data file
•
From the File menu, select Close.
If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.
•
Click Yes to save the file.
•
Click No to abandon the changes.
PC Programming Manual 41
2.3.2 File—Save
2.3.2 File—Save
Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode.
To save a system data file
•
From the File menu, select Save.
42 PC Programming Manual
2.3.3 File—Save As
2.3.3 File—Save As
Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user.
To save a system data file with a new name
1.
From the File menu, select Save As.
2.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
4.
Click Save.
If choosing to overwrite another file, a warning message will be displayed.
•
Click Yes to overwrite.
•
Click No to return to the previous screen.
PC Programming Manual 43
2.3.4 File—Exit
2.3.4 File—Exit
Closes the Maintenance Console.
To exit the Maintenance Console
•
From the File menu, select Exit.
If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.
•
Click Yes to save the file.
•
Click No to abandon the changes.
44 PC Programming Manual
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
2.4 Disconnect
2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect
Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system
data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory
To disconnect
1.
From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2.
Click Yes.
PC Programming Manual 45
2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup
2.5 Tool
2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup
Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen.
To back up system data
•
From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup.
46 PC Programming Manual
2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode,
Mode, on the Network tab of the 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen.
Note
•
Only one card can be configured at a time.
•
To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see
When configuration is complete, the card is automatically returned to INS status.
•
At any time on this screen, you can click Close to return to the previous screen without saving.
To configure the BRI card
1.
From the Tool menu, select BRI Automatic Configuration.
2.
Select the BRI card to configure by clicking the Check cell and setting it to ON.
3.
Click OK.
The ports associated with the selected BRI card will be displayed on a new screen.
4.
Enter suitable Subscriber Numbers for the ports you want to configure.
Only ports whose Subscriber Numbers have been entered will be configured.
5.
Click Execute.
The results of configuration will be displayed.
6.
Click the Check Box cell for the ports that have been configured.
7.
Click Data Apply to save these results to the BRI card.
PC Programming Manual 47
2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear
2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear
Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.
To clear the NDSS Link Data
•
From the Tool menu, select NDSS Link Data Clear.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
•
Click OK to clear the data.
•
Click Cancel to keep the data, and close the screen.
48 PC Programming Manual
2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS
Sets the status of all DXDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously.
To set all DXDP ports to OUS.
1.
From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS.
2.
Click OK.
2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS
PC Programming Manual 49
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
Deletes all voice messages recorded to ESVM cards installed in the PBX.
To delete voice messages
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording.
2.
Select the card from which to delete messages.
3.
Click OK.
50 PC Programming Manual
2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
Displays information on the voice messages stored in ESVM cards installed in the PBX. For each message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed.
To view SVM message status
•
From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage.
PC Programming Manual 51
2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group
To activate this tool
•
From the Tool menu, select Call Pickup for My Group.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the extension is assigned to first personal speed dial.
Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
–
The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
–
" 0" is not used for another feature number.
–
The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
–
The Personal Speed Dialling feature number has been assigned.
52 PC Programming Manual
2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View
2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View
Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature.
The types that can be displayed are as follows:
Type
Intercom
VM
Portable Station
ICDG
WG
VM (DPT)
VM (DTMF)
Pager
MODEM
ISDN Remote
OGM (DISA)
DSS
DPT-I/F CS
SVM
To view extension information
•
From the Tool menu, select Extension List View.
Detail
Wired Extension
Voice Mail
Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) Group
External Pager
Analogue Modem
ISDN Modem
DISA
DSS Console
PT-interface CS
SVM Card
PC Programming Manual 53
2.5.9 Tool—Import
2.5.9 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
cannot be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate editor, before importing.
The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as follows:
Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID
Data Type Import Destination
System Speed Dialling
Number
Name
CO Line Access Number +
Telephone Number
CLI Destination
Location
Name
Dial
CLI Destination
Related programming: 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table
Data Type
Location
DDI/DID Number
DDI/DID Name
DDI/DID Destination-Day
DDI/DID Destination-Lunch
DDI/DID Destination-Break
DDI/DID Destination-Night
Tenant Number
VM Trunk Group No.
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night
Import Destination
Location
Dial In Number
Dial In Name
Destination-Day
Destination-Lunch
Destination-Break
Destination-Night
Tenant Number
Group Number for VPS answer
CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring - Night
Related programming: 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
54 PC Programming Manual
2.5.9 Tool—Import
ARS - Leading Digit
Data Type
No.
Leading Number
Additional Number of Digits
Routing Plan Number
Import Destination
Location
Leading Digit
Additional Dial Digits
Route Plan Number
Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number
ARS - Except Code
Data Type
No.
Leading Number Exception
Import Destination
Location
Exception Code
Related programming: 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
ARS - Routing Plan
Data Type
(no fields to select)
Import Destination
(no fields to select)
Related programming: 10.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time
Wired Extension
Data Type Import Destination
No.
Extension Number
Extension Name
Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name (selected automatically)
Related programming: 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PS Extension
Data Type
No.
Extension Number
Extension Name
Import Destination
Location (selected automatically)
Extension Number (selected automatically)
Extension Name (selected automatically)
Related programming: 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 55
2.5.9 Tool—Import
Quick Dial (Basic)
Data Type
No.
Dial
Phone Number
Import Destination
Location
Dial
Phone Number
Related programming: 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dial (Expansion)
Data Type Import Destination
No.
Dial
Phone Number
Location
Dial
Phone Number
Related programming: 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
To import system data
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2.
Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3.
Select the file.
4.
Click Open to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5.
For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data from the drop-down list.
6.
If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching origin and destination fields are entered by default.
•
To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-down list.
•
To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7.
Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
•
Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.
56 PC Programming Manual
2.5.10 Tool—Export
2.5.10 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
2.5.9 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, in the Windows Regional Options Control Panel.
To export system data
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3.
Enter a file name.
4.
Click Save.
•
When export fields are automatically selected, the file will be saved.
•
When export fields can be selected, the selection screen will be displayed automatically.
5.
For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, select the Speed Dial table from which to export the data from the drop-down list.
A list of field names that can be exported will be displayed.
6.
Click the check box beside the name of each field that you want to export.
7.
Click OK.
PC Programming Manual 57
2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level
Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited.
To modify displayed screens
1.
From the Tool menu, point to Screen Customize, and then click the access level to modify.
2.
Select the items that you want to have displayed.
•
Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
•
Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3.
Click OK.
58 PC Programming Manual
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
2.6 Utility
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. Test results can be saved as a TXT-format (text) file.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are to be used again.
Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary according to the type of card being tested.
The tests that are performed on each card are as follows:
Test Type Available Cards
Local loop back diagnosis
Card CT Bus diagnosis
DTMF Receive test port
PT loop back diagnosis
DSP DTMF generator/receiver diagnosis
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis
, MCSLC, CSIF, LCOT, CLCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M,
DID, IP-EXT
, CSIF, LCOT, CLCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID,
IP-EXT
MCSLC, E&M, DID
T1, E1
T1, E1
Framer IC alarm signal detection diagnosis
T1, E1, PRI
Framer IC error detection diagnosis T1, E1, PRI
CS-INF loop back diagnosis CSIF
Super frame synchronization diagnosis
CSIF
Caller ID card loop back diagnosis LCOT, CLCOT
Extension mode setting test
CTI-LINK loop back diagnosis
BRI
CTI-LINK
IP-GW H.323 call simulate diagnosis IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484), IP-GW16
LAN loop back diagnosis IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
*1 The only test performed on the DLC4 on the DMPR card is PT loop back diagnosis.
To perform a card test
1.
From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2.
Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
PC Programming Manual 59
2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis
3.
Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4.
Select the Card Test option.
A new window will be displayed.
5.
Click Test to perform the test(s).
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on the last line of the output.
6.
Select an option:
•
Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2.
Click Save.
•
Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.
Network Loopback Test
Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card.
Note
•
To perform this test, it is necessary to set
Loopback Test started by Network in 3.15 [1-1] Slot
—Port Property - PRI Port to "Enable".
•
The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
To perform a network loopback test
1.
From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2.
Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card, and set it to "OUS".
3.
Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4.
Select the Loopback Type option.
A new window will be displayed.
5.
Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.
6.
Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.
7.
After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply.
8.
Click Close to return to the Diagnosis screen.
60 PC Programming Manual
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Copies PBX system files (program files and data files) from the connected PC to the SD memory card installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the SD memory card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Two types of files can be copied using this tool:
•
Program files: These contain the programs used to operate cards within the PBX and CSs, acting as on-board drivers.
•
Data files: These contain the initial configuration data for individual cards and settings.
Not all files that are copied using this tool are automatically made active. To install new program files or main
system data to the PBX, use the System Reset—Reset by the Command utility (see 2.6.17 Utility—System
Reset—Reset by the Command) for PDMPR and DDSYS files, and the SD Card File View and Load utility
(see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load) for all other files.
The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains supported data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.
The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows:
Main Program
Name on SD Memory Card
PDMPR
PDMPR_S
Corresponding Card
DMPR
*1 PDMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PDMPR_S".
LPR Program
Name on SD Memory Card
PCSINF
PDHLC
PEESLC
PT1
PE1
PEM
PBRI
PIPGWH
PIPGW16
PPRI23
PPRI30
Corresponding Card
CSIF
DLC8, DLC16
MCSLC16, MCSLC24
T1
E1
E&M
BRI
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
IP-GW16
PRI23
PRI30
PC Programming Manual 61
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Name on SD Memory Card
POPB3
PCTILINK
PDID
PIPEXT
PVOIPEX
CS Program
Name on SD Memory Card
PCSDECT
PDCSDECT
PHCSDECT
PCS24G
PDCS24G
Default Value Data
Name on SD Memory Card
DDINI
DDIDLC
DDIDLC2
DDISLC2
Corresponding Card
OPB
CTI-LINK
DID8
IP-EXT16
IP-EXT16
Corresponding Unit
CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station
CS using a DLC card for DECT Portable Station
High-density CS for DECT Portable Station
CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
CS using a DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station
System Data
Name on SD Memory Card
DDSYS
DDSYS_S
Corresponding Card
DMPR
DMPR
*1 DDSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DDSYS_S".
Language Data
Name on SD Memory Card
DLNG0–DLNG5
DVMLNG1–DVMLNG5
Corresponding Unit
PT
VPS (Display Guidance data)
Corresponding Card
DMPR
DLC8, DLC16
DLC4
MCSLC16, MCSLC24
62 PC Programming Manual
2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)
Name on SD Memory Card
DDIBRI
DDICSINF
DDILCOT
DDIT1
DDIE1
DDIEM
DDIOPB3
DDICTILI
DDIEIO
DDIIPGW2
DDIIPGW3
DDIPRI23
DDIPRI30
DDIDID
DDIIPEXT
Corresponding Card
BRI
CSIF
LCOT4, LCOT8, LCOT16, CLCOT8/16
T1
E1
E&M
OPB3
CTI-LINK
EIO
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
IP-GW16
PRI23
PRI30
DID8
IP-EXT16
To transfer files to the SD memory card
1.
From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).
The dialogue box will be displayed.
2.
Select the file to upload.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3.
Click OK.
PC Programming Manual 63
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
2.6.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC
Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows:
File Name File Type
DDSYS
$SYSERR
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
DKEYSD
System Data
Error Data
Feature Restriction
Downloading the DDSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the configuration of the PBX.
The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be numbered in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.
To transfer files to the PC
1.
From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC.
2.
Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error message to be displayed.
3.
Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed
4.
Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5.
Enter a file name.
6.
Click Save.
A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
7.
Click OK.
64 PC Programming Manual
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load
2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load
Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programs stored in LPR cards
(cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs).
This option is only available at Installer level.
To update the program stored in an LPR card, the card must first be set to out of service (OUS). To update the program stored in a CS, the port of the card (CSIF/DLC) that the CS is attached to must be set to OUS, but the card itself must be set to in service (INS). Only cards that are in the correct status will be displayed.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
To view and load files on the SD memory card
1.
From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load.
2.
Click on the name of the desired file.
Only files containing program data (whose filenames start with "P") can be selected.
3.
Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed. Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed on the left.
4.
From the Card drop-down list on the right, select the card(s) whose software you want to update.
•
To update a specific card or port:
•
LPR cards: select the slot number and card name.
•
CSs: select the slot number and card name, and then select the related CS port from the drop-down list directly below.
•
To update all matching cards simultaneously:
•
Select "ALL".
5.
Click View to update the displayed header information of the selected files.
The file with the higher File Version and File Revision numbers is newer.
6.
Click Load to update the file stored on the PBX.
When the update is finished, a message will be displayed.
7.
Click OK.
The display will return to the Detail screen.
PC Programming Manual 65
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete
2.6.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete
Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility:
•
PDMPR
•
DDSYS
•
DKEYSD
To delete files from the SD memory card
1.
From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.
2.
Click on the file to be deleted.
3.
Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4.
Click OK.
The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen.
66 PC Programming Manual
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the selected MSG/ESVM card.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. The
OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status.
Files are stored on the MSG/ESVM card in the location specified by the file’s header information. Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If this location already contains an OGM, it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.
To transfer OGMs to an MSG/ESVM card
1.
From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2.
Select the target MSG/ESVM card, or "ALL", from the drop-down list, and click OK.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
3.
Select the message files to upload.
It is possible to select multiple files.
4.
Click OK.
The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
PC Programming Manual 67
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the MSG/ESVM card to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. The
OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status.
To transfer OGMs to the PC
1.
From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PBX to PC.
2.
From the upper drop-down list, select the target MSG/ESVM card.
3.
From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
•
To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
•
To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
4.
Enter a file name.
5.
Click Save.
6.
Click OK.
When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a number appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location on the MSG/ESVM card.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.
68 PC Programming Manual
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
2.6.8 Utility—Error Log
Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:
Button Function
Cancel
Capture
Minor
Major
Clear
Log Information
Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system operation.
Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or result in system failure.
Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the
PBX.
Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:
Item
Index
Date
Time
Error Code
Sub Code
Error Message
Description
The ordinal number assigned to an error record in the current log.
The date of the error detection.
The time of the error detection.
The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.
The 5-digit sub code of the relevant hardware. (XYYZZ)
•
X: Shelf number
1
•
YY: Slot number
00-07, 11 (00: DMPR; 01 to 07: Free slot; 11: DLC4 port on the
DMPR)
•
ZZ: Physical port number (01 to 24)
For OPB3 card, sub slot number (1 to 3) + port number (1 to 4) will be displayed as follows:
•
Sub slot 1 of OPB3: 11 to 14
•
Sub slot 2 of OPB3: 21 to 24
•
Sub slot 3 of OPB3: 31 to 34
A description of the error.
To view the error log
•
From the Utility menu, select Error Log.
PC Programming Manual 69
2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor
Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 or E1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.
To view signalling bit information
1.
From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3.
From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh.
4.
Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5.
Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.
70 PC Programming Manual
2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace
2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace
Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line.
This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
To view trace data
1.
From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Line Trace.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3.
From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.
4.
Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being monitored changes.
5.
Click Stop to end the trace.
6.
Select an option:
•
Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information is saved as a text-format file.
•
Click Clear to erase the information.
PC Programming Manual 71
2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be set to
INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN and IP-GW cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded:
•
Real Time Trace (not available when connected via LAN): Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
•
Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
•
Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.
To view trace data
1.
From the Utility menu, select ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3.
From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
4.
Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
5.
Select an option:
•
Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
•
Click Clear to clear the screen display.
6.
Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
72 PC Programming Manual
2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report
2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report
Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment being used, and the distance from the telephone company.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Time
Slot
Counter of Digital Trunk
Error Logs logged in
"Minor Error" Log
Counter of minor communication error
Out of SYNC (#300)
RAI (#301)
AIS (#302)
Frame Failure (#300)
CRC
SF
Description
Time of error
Relevant slot and card type
Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Digital trunk RAI signal reception
Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception
Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Cyclic Redundancy Check error
Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
Frame synchronisation bit-error
Line Code Violation
Controlled slip
FE
LV
SL
To view digital trunk information
1.
From the Utility menu, select Digital Trunk Error Report.
2.
From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
•
To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
•
To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
3.
From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
4.
Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.
PC Programming Manual 73
2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on both IP extensions and IP-EXT cards.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Collection Started Time
Port No.
RTP Receive Packet Counter
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms]
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms]
Description
Date and time the port was last reset.
Number of the port.
Total number of packets received.
Total number of packets lost.
Total number of packets abandoned.
Maximum time taken for a packet to arrive.
Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive.
To view IP extension information
1.
From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information.
2.
From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number.
3.
Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
4.
Select an option:
•
Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2.
Click Save.
•
Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
5.
Click Cancel to return to the main screen.
74 PC Programming Manual
2.6.14 Utility—CS Information
2.6.14 Utility—CS Information
Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target CSIF or DLC card be set to INS status.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
Slot
Port
CS Name
Status
Version
Revision
CSID
Path
Group Call
Description
Number of the slot
Number of the port
Name of the attached CS
Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left blank.
Version number of the program file stored in the CS
Revision number of the program file stored in the CS
12-digit ID number of the CS
Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the case of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating extension number.
The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model.
For more details, see the documentation for your CS.
Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS
Ring Group.
To view CS information
1.
From the Utility menu, select CS Information.
2.
From the Target CSI/F Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot.
•
To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card.
•
To display information on all matching cards, select "ALL".
3.
From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh.
4.
Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
5.
Click Stop to end monitoring.
6.
Select an option:
•
Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1.
Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2.
Click Start.
•
Click Close to return to the main screen.
PC Programming Manual 75
2.6.15 Utility—PS Information
2.6.15 Utility—PS Information
Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item
PS No.
Extension Number
Location—Slot
Location—Port
Description
PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension number of the PS.
Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
To view PS information
1.
From the Utility menu, select PS Information.
2.
Click Refresh.
76 PC Programming Manual
2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update
2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update
Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards.
This option is only available at Installer level.
It is recommended to set the timed update to take place during the least active time period, for example late at night.
Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update, and returned to INS status when the update is complete.
This utility does not apply to CS programs. These must be updated manually using the SD Card File View
and Load utility (see 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load).
When this utility has been set, all commands that would affect the status of cards are prevented from operating.
The list of these commands is as follows:
•
Card status change (INS/OUS)
•
Diagnosis commands
•
Card installation
•
Card deletion
•
Remote reset
•
LPR program download requests
•
ISDN automatic setup requests (BRI card)
•
Signalling Bit Monitor requests (T1/E1)
•
Line trace start requests (T1/E1)
•
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests
•
Time setting
•
CS program download requests
•
File deletion
When a function other than those listed above, that cannot be performed while Timed Update has been set, is selected, an error message will be displayed.
To turn this utility on:
1.
From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
2.
Select the Set option.
The time setting box will become available.
3.
Enter the desired time using the number keys.
Click in the hour or minute field and use the up and down arrows to adjust the displayed time in increments of one unit.
4.
Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
5.
Click Yes.
To turn this utility off:
1.
From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
2.
Select the Off (Cancel) option.
3.
Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
4.
Click Yes.
PC Programming Manual 77
2.6.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
2.6.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command
Updates the main system program and data files stored within the PBX using files taken from the SD memory card, and resets the connected PBX.
This option is only available at Installer level.
2 copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these files are as follows:
File Name Description
DDSYS
DDSYS_S
PDMPR
PDMPR_S
Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for the PBX.
Backup main system data file
PBX program file. Contains the software to run the DMPR board of the
PBX.
Backup PBX program file
When new DDSYS and PDMPR files are transferred from a connected PC to the SD memory card using the
stored as the backup files. To use these files on the PBX, it is necessary to first swap them with the currently active files on the SD memory card.
To update system files and reset the PBX
1.
From the Utility menu, point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command.
2.
Choose whether to back up current system data or not.
•
Click SD Backup to back up the current system data to the SD memory card before proceeding.
Select this if you intend to use the current system data unchanged after reset.
•
Click Skip to continue without backing up.
Select this if you intend to replace the current system data with data that was uploaded from the PC.
The second screen will be displayed. A list of matching files found on the SD memory card, with dates and times, is shown at the top.
3.
Select whether to replace the DDSYS and PDMPR files or not.
When no backup file is found, the corresponding options are not available.
4.
Click OK.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
5.
Select an option:
•
Click OK to reset the PBX.
If OK is clicked, a final confirmation screen will be displayed.
•
Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
6.
Click OK to reset the PBX, or Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
If the reset command was not carried out correctly, an error message will be displayed, and you will be returned to the main screen.
After resetting the PBX with this command, it is necessary to reconnect to the PBX to continue programming.
78 PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
2.7 Help
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:
Title Description
Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Using the Maintenance Console software.
Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Setting up portable stations, including registration and deregistration.
Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual extensions or features.
Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting up individual features.
Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via RS-232C cable.
A
•
Is the cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
•
Is the serial port that the PC uses correctly specified?
•
Is the baud rate correct?
The default setting, and a safe rate, is 19 200 bps.
•
Is the password correct?
•
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB.
A
•
Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
•
Is the USB driver on the PC running?
To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB
Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB driver
•
Is the password correct?
•
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via LAN.
A
•
Is the PC connected to the LAN?
•
Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details,
see 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK.
•
Is the password correct?
•
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem.
PC Programming Manual 79
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A
•
Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
•
Has a modem been installed to the PBX?
•
Are the modem settings of the PBX and Maintenance Console correct? For more
details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main.
•
Is the password correct?
•
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via ISDN Remote.
A
•
Are the ISDN Remote settings of the PC correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1]
•
Is the ISDN Remote dial number correct?
•
Is the password correct?
•
Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?
Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A
•
Yes. This is possible in Batch mode.
Create a new system data file using 2.2.1 Start Menu—New, edit settings as required,
and then upload this file to the PBX later (see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX
Maintenance Console Software
Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A
•
From 3.1 [1-1] Slot, click Summary. Summary information, including software
versions, is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too narrow.
A
•
Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all characters are displayed.
Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".
A
•
With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the maximum supported by the PBX?
•
Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install" for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
•
Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed correctly in the slot.
•
Confirm that the card is not damaged.
Q I want to set the status of only 1 port of the IP-GW4 card to "OUS".
A
•
This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be set to "OUS"/"INS" together.
80 PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.
A
•
Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
•
Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
•
Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
•
Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
•
Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.
Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?
A
•
Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 3.43 [1-3]
Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of Service (OUS)".
Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in Portable Station
[1-2].
A
•
Is the status of the CSIF or DLC card set to "INS"?
•
Is a CS connected to the CSIF or DLC card? If not, connect one.
•
Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station match? Confirm that they are the same.
•
Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
•
Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the
De-registration option to delete the previous registration.
Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.
A
•
First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.
Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.
A
•
Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
•
Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to the CS and try the de-registration operation again.
Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable Station, so it cannot be de-registered.
A
•
The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by the following the procedure shown in
Forced De-registration of 3.42 [1-2] Portable Station.
Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable
Station still shows the old extension number.
A
•
Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old FCO.
PC Programming Manual 81
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A
•
Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.
Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable
Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A
•
Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is necessary for it to operate.
Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A
•
Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A
•
The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.
Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit numbers?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
Open the 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2.
Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?
A
•
There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 4.8 [2-6-1]
1.
Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example:
Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2.
Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example:
Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
82 PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by
any extensions (see 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension
number (see 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
2.
Clear the Leading Number cell.
3.
Click Apply.
4.
Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5.
Click Apply.
6.
Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7.
Click Apply.
8.
Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9.
On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.
10.
Set all extension ports back to INS status.
Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A
•
It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set
"21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
•
A feature number
•
Another extension block
•
Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•
Quick Dialling (see 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
Clear the Leading Number cell.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
Set
No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4.
Click Apply.
5.
Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8.
On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired values.
9.
Set all extension ports back to INS status.
Q How do I change a feature number?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
Open the 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2.
Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3.
Click Apply.
PC Programming Manual 83
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q I cannot change a feature number.
A
•
It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
•
A feature number
•
An extension
•
Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•
Quick Dialling (see 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
Open the 4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2.
Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3.
Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4.
Click Apply.
Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.
A
•
It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
•
A feature number
•
An extension
•
Dial setting (see 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
•
Quick Dialling (see 4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.
Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A
•
The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.
Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly installed card?
A
•
New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for
Extension Card in the 3.43 [1-3] Option screen from "Automatic" to "Manual".
Saving Modified Data
Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A
•
Click Apply or OK in the sub-menu screen.
Q Modified settings are not saved even when I press the Apply button.
A
•
To save the system data files, choose Save from the File menu.
Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not updated in the PBX.
84 PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A
•
When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the SD memory backup icon to save the system data to the SD memory card. Alternatively, exit the Maintenance Console. This automatically saves system data to the SD memory card.
Note
Do not remove the SD memory card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.
Q After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A
•
The following setting data is not saved to the SD memory card, so will be deleted when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup memory.
•
Incoming Call Log
•
Outgoing Call Log (including Last Number Redial)
•
Message Waiting
•
SMDR
•
Advice of Charge (AOC)/Pay Tone
•
Hospitality guest billing data
•
ICD Group monitor log for supervisor
•
PBX date and time
•
Timed Reminder
•
LPR Timed Update time
•
PT handset/headset volume
•
PT SP-PHONE volume
•
PT ring volume
•
PT display contrast
•
ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
•
ICD Group Ready/Not Ready status
(All extensions are set to Ready by default.)
•
Live Call Screening (LCS) On/Off
•
Hands-free Answerback status
•
Absent Message status of extensions
(Absent Message data itself is not cleared.)
•
FWD/DND status
(FWD destinations are not cleared.)
•
Extension Dial Lock/Remote Extension Dial Lock
•
Extension PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock counter
•
Verification Code PIN Lock/Verification Code PIN Lock counter
•
Password Lock counter for Remote System Programming
•
PBX Error Log
•
Digital Trunk Error Report data
In addition, the following data cannot be restored:
•
SVM Log and messages (both greeting messages and voice messages left by callers) recorded in an ESVM card
PC Programming Manual 85
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?
A
•
From the 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the
Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.
Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?
A
•
From the 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, modify the
Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set separately.
Q What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?
A
•
From the 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen, set the
the port you want to use to "Extension".
Q When using a TE with an extension ISDN, how do I enable power output?
A
•
From the 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen, set
on the ISDN Extension tab to "Enable".
Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?
A
•
From the 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either
"QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".
Q How do I change the type of an extension port?
A
•
Set the port to OUS status. Then, change
—Port Property - Extension Port window
DPT Type—Type in the 3.4 [1-1] Slot
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "DSS Console", but I cannot apply this setting. (Error E000402)
A
•
DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another DSS
Console. Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "VM (DPT)", but I cannot apply this setting.
(Error E000403)
A
•
The DPT Type—VM Unit No. and DPT Type—VM Port No. settings entered on
the 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen are the same as those
entered for another VM (DPT). Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
Q I have set the type of an extension port to "PC Console", but I cannot apply this setting. (Error E000402)
A
•
DPT Type—Location No. on the 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port
Property - Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another PC Console.
Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.
86 PC Programming Manual
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Q What programming do I have to perform to use a headset with an extension?
A
•
Headset OFF/ON on the 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
screen to "Headset ON".
Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?
A
•
Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service
Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?
A
•
Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—
Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose
extensions are blocked from calling each other.
Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?
A
•
Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 4.12 [2-7-2] Class of
Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk
groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).
Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?
A
•
It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT—SLT Hold Mode option on the 4.17 [2-9] System Options screen.
For more details, see "1.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Guide.
Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls directly?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
2.
Click Apply.
3.
On the 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, select the ICD group you created from the Incoming Call
Distribution drop-down list.
4.
Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the
5.
Click Apply.
6.
On the DIL tab of the 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the
floating extension number of the ICD group as the
Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.
7.
Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.
Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
PC Programming Manual 87
2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
On the 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.
2.
On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table
to use in each time mode.
Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group?
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
On the 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Member List screen, from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select
the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2.
Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
3.
Set
4.
Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.
Q I cannot set system speed dialling numbers from PC Console.
A
•
Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class, by setting
Manager on the Extension Feature tab of the 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of
Service—COS Settings screen to "Enable".
•
System speed dialling numbers can only be edited by one PC Console at a time.
Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being forwarded.
A
•
Perform the following steps:
1.
Check that the
Call from CO—Present Button Status or
Extension—Present Button Status of the target extension on the 6.3 [4-1-2]
Wired Extension—FWD/DND or 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
screen is set to "FWD".
2.
Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3.
Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.
88 PC Programming Manual
Section 3
[1] Configuration
PC Programming Manual 89
3.1 [1-1] Slot
3.1 [1-1] Slot
The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary
To install a new card to the PBX
1.
Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed to the left of the list, and information about the card will be shown below.
2.
Click and drag the image of the card to the free slot it is to be installed in, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3.
Click Yes to confirm.
To access card properties
1.
Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.
To access port properties
1.
Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.
To remove a card from the PBX
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select Delete.
3.
Click Yes to confirm.
The card will be removed.
To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (Interactive mode only)
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2.
Select the desired status:
•
Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
•
Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.
To install an option card on an OPB3 card
1.
Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
90 PC Programming Manual
3.1 [1-1] Slot
2.
Select Option Card.
The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 3.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card
Supported Card Types
Card
DMPR: Main Processing Card
DLC4: 4-Digital Extension Port on the
DMPR Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
MCSLC16: 16-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Caller ID and Message Lamp Card
MCSLC24: 24-Port Single Line
Telephone Extension with Caller ID and Message Lamp Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension
Card
CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card
CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk
Card
CLCOT8/16: 8-Port Analogue Trunk
Card with CID (CLCOT8), and 8-Port
Analogue Trunk with Caller ID
Daughter Card (CLCOT8E)
DID8: 8-Port DID Card
Maximum Quantity
1 (fixed in Slot 0)
1 (fixed in Slot 11)
7
5
7
4
7
None
Card Programming
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
None
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
4
7
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
PC Programming Manual 91
3.1 [1-1] Slot
Card
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel
VoIP Gateway Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
Maximum Quantity
4
Card Programming
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card
4
1
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property -
For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.2.1 Optional Equipment" in the Installation
Manual.
92 PC Programming Manual
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
No.
Indicates the slot number (reference only).
Value Range
Available slot numbers.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Card Type
Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the PBX (reference only). Note that for DMPR cards, the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name.
Value Range
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC4: 4-DLC Port on the DMPR Card
MCSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Caller ID and Message Lamp Card
MCSLC24: 24-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Caller ID and Message Lamp Card
CSI/F: 4 or 8 Cell Station Interface Card
LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
CLCOT8/16: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card with CID (CLCOT8), and 8-Port Analogue Trunk with Caller ID
Daughter Card (CLCOT8E)
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
DID8: 8-Port DID Card
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card
PC Programming Manual 93
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
DMPR: DMPR Card
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the card status (reference only)
Note that DMPR card status is always displayed as "-".
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Version
Indicates the LPR version of the installed card (reference only).
94 PC Programming Manual
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
For IP-EXT16 cards, both the LPR version and the VoIP version are displayed. The LPR version is shown on the left, and the VoIP version on the right, as follows:
(Example) 1.002 / 1.001
Value Range
Version number
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 95
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
The property for the extension cards can be specified.
KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode
Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are reversed or not.
This setting is not used with the KX-TDA150.
Value Range
Mode 1: Does not switch the control signals
Mode 2: Switches the control signals
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Pulse Dial Mode
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Off Hook Time
Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as an off-hook signal.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–255) ms
96 PC Programming Manual
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Off Hook Guard Time
Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=12–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 97
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button.
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold.
Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.3 Call Splitting
Flash Timing - Min.
Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
98 PC Programming Manual
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash Timing - Range
Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF-R STD Detection Time
Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone.
Value Range
2
´ n (n=1–31) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
SLT Power Supply
Indicates the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the Message Waiting lamp (reference only).
PC Programming Manual 99
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Value Range
85 V
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Optional Equipment
Indicates whether an Extension Caller ID card is mounted on the SLC8 card (reference only). This is only available with SLC8 cards.
This setting is not used with the KX-TDA150.
Value Range
None, Caller ID
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Installation Manual References
None
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
APT/SLT Parallel Ring
Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the APT for calls.
This setting is not used with the KX-TDA150.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
100 PC Programming Manual
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
Hook Threshold PD A-law
Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for switching from Power Down mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
Value Range
1.5–4.0 mA
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Hook Threshold PD µ-law
Specifies the current threshold (µ-law) for switching from Power Down mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
Value Range
1.5–4.0 mA
Maintenance Console Location
3.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 101
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
Note
The extension information for the DLC4 port on the DMPR card is shown at the top of the Port Property
- Extension Port list.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port or channel number (reference only).
Value Range
Port or channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).
102 PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (MCSLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only).
The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View.
Value Range
DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
PC Programming Manual 103
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Extension numbers of PSs can be a maximum of 4 digits.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
104 PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
XDP Mode
Turns XDP mode on or off for the port.
This setting is not used with the KX-TDA150.
Value Range
On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is called
XDP Mode.)
Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone’s extension number.
This is called Parallel Mode.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Parallel Telephone Ringing
Specifies whether the sub telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main telephone (DPT) for an incoming call.
This setting is not used with the KX-TDA150.
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 105
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
DPT Type—Type
Selects the port type.
To change the port type of an extension port, follow the steps below:
1.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS".
2.
Change the port type of the extension port, then click Apply.
3.
Set the status of the extension port to "INS".
When changing the port type of an extension port for which
Wireless XDP has been set on the
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings screen, the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted
first.
When changing the type of a port for which one or more SDN buttons are set (except when changing between PC Console and Telephone), all SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click
Cancel.
Value Range
Normal: For connecting a DPT
DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be connected.)
VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration
PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
DPT Type—Location No.
Specifies the location number of the connected DSS Console or PC Console. This setting is only available
when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to DSS or PC Console.
Note that, depending on system traffic, there may be a limit to the number of PC Consoles that can be supported by a single DLC card.
When changing the location number of a DSS Console for which one or more SDN buttons are set, all SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel.
Value Range
1–8
106 PC Programming Manual
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
DPT Type—VM Unit No.
screen is set to VM (DPT).
Value Range
1, 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
DPT Type—VM Port No.
Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this
screen is set to VM (DPT).
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
PC Programming Manual 107
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT).
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.4 Headset Operation
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls. This setting is only available when
Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT). This setting is not available for the SLTs.
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
108 PC Programming Manual
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the extension ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 109
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port
Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs).
This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode.
Type
Indicates the types of telephone (reference only).
Value Range
New-DPT (KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series DPTs), SLT, DSS Console, VM, Other, CS, High-density CS,
IP-EXT
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Total Count
Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX (reference only). CSs are counted on the basis of the number of CSIF ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Feature Guide References
None
110 PC Programming Manual
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
PC Programming Manual 111
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Value Range
INS: The Cell Station (CS) is in service.
OUS: The CS is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the CS.
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Programming Manual References
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
CS Name
Specifies the name of the CSIF port.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
112 PC Programming Manual
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the CS out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the CS, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 113
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.
CLCOT8E Card
Indicates whether a CLCOT8E (KX-TDA1186) card is mounted on the CLCOT8 (KX-TDA1180) card (reference only).
Value Range
None, Installed
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Outgoing Guard Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
3–6 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
0.5
´ n (n=1–16) s
114 PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer
Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
Value Range
24
´ n (n=1–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 115
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer
Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.
Value Range
1.0 s–15.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16
´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
116 PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial.
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Value Range
4
´ n (n=6–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
PC Programming Manual 117
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
4
´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial.
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Value Range
4
´ n (n=4–18) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
118 PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Guide References
None
High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial.
% Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
Value Range
4
´ n (n=3–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2
Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT card (reference only).
Value Range
None, Caller ID Card
PC Programming Manual 119
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling
Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company.
Value Range
FSK, FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Max Receive Time
Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.
Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
120 PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection
Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID. To enable this setting,
Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection
Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information.
Value Range
Length + Timer, Timer
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination
Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting,
Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
PC Programming Manual 121
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after receiving a call. To enable this setting,
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Value Range
None, 80
´ n (n=1–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer
ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.
Value Range
80
´ n (n=13–50) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Start Code 1 and Start Code 2
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code
2.
122 PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of the information segment of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 123
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code-PRIVATE, OUT OF AREA,
TECHNICAL REASON, UNKNOWN NUMBER, RESTRICTED NUMBER
Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Header[03]
Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal.
Value Range
DDN, Caller ID
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency
Selects the frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company.
This setting is not available with CLCOT card.
Value Range
12kHz, 16kHz
124 PC Programming Manual
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Gain
Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone.
This setting is not available with CLCOT card.
Value Range
0–31 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MIN
Specifies the minimum length that a received pay tone signal must be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal.
This setting is not available with CLCOT card.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–250) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
PC Programming Manual 125
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MAX
Specifies the maximum length that a received pay tone signal can be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal.
This setting is not available with CLCOT card.
Value Range
None, 8
´ n (n=1–250) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - Interval
Specifies the maximum length of time between pay tone signals.
This setting is not available with CLCOT card.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–250) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk
Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal.
This setting is not available with CLCOT card.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
126 PC Programming Manual
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
PC Programming Manual 127
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
128 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Busy Out Status
Indicates the Busy Out status (reference only).
Value Range
Normal, Busy Out
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
PC Programming Manual 129
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8
´ n (n=1–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analogue trunk.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk.
Value Range
Low, High
130 PC Programming Manual
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Reverse Detection
Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected.
Value Range
Disable: For no trunk call
Outgoing: For outgoing trunk calls only
Both Call: For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit
Caller ID Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
3.9 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual 131
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Pay Tone Detection
Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
132 PC Programming Manual
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
PC Programming Manual 133
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.10 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
Feature Guide References
None
134 PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified.
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T202
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
PC Programming Manual 135
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Value Range
0–18000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
136 PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
PC Programming Manual 137
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.
138 PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 139
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
140 PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
PC Programming Manual 141
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T201
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
142 PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
ISDN Extension—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
Value Range
0–18000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
PC Programming Manual 143
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.
144 PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T307
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting.
Value Range
0–6000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 145
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to
ISDN.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
146 PC Programming Manual
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T320
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 147
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
ISDN Extension—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.
Value Range
0–600
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Extension—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.
Value Range
0–3000
´ 100 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
Programming Manual References
None
148 PC Programming Manual
Feature Guide References
None
3.12 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
PC Programming Manual 149
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
150 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
LLC Information
Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual 151
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is detected.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call.
Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
152 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
PC Programming Manual 153
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
154 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Outgoing Call Type
Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—
ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
PC Programming Manual 155
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode
Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.
Value Range
1-link: One TEI is assigned to the BRI CO port.
2-link: Two TEIs are assigned to the BRI CO port. (Available when
Access Mode on the Network tab is set
to P-MP.)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Networking Data Transfer
Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available
when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information.
156 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
PC Programming Manual 157
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
158 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
ISDN TE Power
Enables the PBX to supply power to the ISDN TE (Terminal Equipment).
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)
Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension.
Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
ISDN Extension Progress Tone
Enables the PBX to send call progress tones to the ISDN extension. This setting is only available when Port
Type on this screen is set to Extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual 159
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Network
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
160 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.
PC Programming Manual 161
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
L1 Mode
Selects the active mode of L1 (Layer 1) on the BRI port.
Value Range
Call, Permanent
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
L2 Mode
Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.
Value Range
Call, Permanent
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
162 PC Programming Manual
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Access Mode
Selects the configuration of the BRI port.
Value Range
P-P: Point-to-Point
P-MP: Point-to-multipoint
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
TEI Mode
Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI port.
Value Range
Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Network Numbering Plan
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
PC Programming Manual 163
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
164 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.
Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)
Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
PC Programming Manual 165
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
166 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Supplementary Service
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
PC Programming Manual 167
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
168 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
When using the Centralised VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".
Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E:
No, Yes
For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
CCBS Option
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
PC Programming Manual 169
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another
PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
170 PC Programming Manual
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
CCBS Type
Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.
Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
PC Programming Manual 171
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
CCBS Delete Digits
Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
call.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
172 PC Programming Manual
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 173
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.
Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
174 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
•
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
PC Programming Manual 175
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or Mandatory) is detected.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call.
Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CRC4 Mode
Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to
32-bit character. (Assignable only when using the PRI30 card.)
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
176 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port.
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the port. This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card.
Value Range
Extend Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in
PC Programming Manual 177
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
•
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
178 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 179
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Outgoing Call Type
Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—
ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company’s ISDN Centrex Service features.
180 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Networking Data Transfer
Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when
Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
Section 11 [9] Private Network
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Loopback Test started by Network
Enables a loopback test started from the network side, to be performed on the PRI23 card.
Note
The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
PC Programming Manual 181
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
182 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Port Type
Selects the type of the port.
Note
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
•
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 183
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)
Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".
Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension
Network Configuration
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
184 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
•
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
PC Programming Manual 185
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.
Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Network Numbering Plan
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
186 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
•
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
PC Programming Manual 187
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the port.
Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)
Calling Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
188 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private
Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks.
Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber
PC Programming Manual 189
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Supplementary Service
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
190 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Port Type
Selects the port type.
Note
•
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
•
ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 191
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
The available services depend on the setting of
When using the Centralised VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".
Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E:
No, Yes
For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
CCBS Type
Selects the type of call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.
Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
192 PC Programming Manual
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
CCBS Delete Digits
Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type
call.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
PC Programming Manual 193
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
None
194 PC Programming Manual
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
The properties of the T1 card can be specified.
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used.
Value Range
B8ZS, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications.
Value Range
D4, ESF
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ESF Frame Sequence
set to ESF.
Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1
PC Programming Manual 195
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Send Option
Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU.
Value Range
Mode-1–Mode-8
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Receive Option
Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.
Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
196 PC Programming Manual
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
First Dial Timer (CO)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
0.5
´ n (n=1–16) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=1–255) ms
PC Programming Manual 197
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16
´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
198 PC Programming Manual
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted.
Value Range
3-n (n=0–15) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Receive
Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be received.
Value Range
n-42–0 (n=0–31) dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
PC Programming Manual 199
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
200 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
PC Programming Manual 201
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX)
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (OPX)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Width (OPX)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–191) ms
202 PC Programming Manual
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE)
Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (TIE)
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 203
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Flash—Flash Width (TIE)
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
204 PC Programming Manual
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type
PC Programming Manual 205
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Value Range
Channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
206 PC Programming Manual
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 207
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Channel Type
Selects the channel type.
Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
GCOT: Ground Start Central Office
LCOT: Loop Start Central Office
DDI/DID: Direct Dialling In/Direct Inward Dialling
TIE (E & M): TIE Line
OPX: Off Premise Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.23.1 T1 Line Service
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the TIE channel.
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
208 PC Programming Manual
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI/DID.
Value Range
None, 80
´ n (n=2–75) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to GCOT or LCOT.
Value Range
None, 8
´ n (n=2–112) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
PC Programming Manual 209
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel.
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
Value Range
64
´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
210 PC Programming Manual
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE.
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE.
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
PC Programming Manual 211
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone. This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI/DID.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
212 PC Programming Manual
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Value Range
1.5 s , 2.5 s , 3.5 s , 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 213
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
214 PC Programming Manual
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 215
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
The properties of the E1 card can be specified.
To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2.
Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.
Value Range
HDB3, AMI
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 card.
Value Range
PCM30, PCM30-CRC
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Option
Selects the value for C-bit and D-bit.
Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1
216 PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 217
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Seizure ACK Wait Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal.
Value Range
0.5
´ n (n=1–20) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Send Option
Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU (reference only).
Value Range
Mode 1–Mode 8
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
LIU Receive Option
Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.
Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
218 PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Feature Guide References
None
RAI Signal Detection Mode
Selects the RAI signal detection mode.
Value Range
Type 1, Type 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause.
Value Range
64 + 16
´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
PC Programming Manual 219
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
220 PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
PC Programming Manual 221
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from an E1 line.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from an E1 line.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Width
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an E1 line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.
222 PC Programming Manual
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 223
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
224 PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal
Setting
DR2 Setting Type
Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal.
Value Range
Normal, Option-1, Option-3
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Inter-digit Timer
DR2 Setting Type on this screen.
Value Range
3–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Bit Position for Dial Pulse
Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit in a DR2 signal.
Value Range
A-bit, B-bit
PC Programming Manual 225
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Bit Position for Clear Back
Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal.
Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Forced Release
Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
226 PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Forced Release Pattern
Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal.
Value Range
A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M Signalling Type
Selects the control bit of an E & M signal.
Value Range
Type-1:A bit=0, Type-2:A bit=1, Type-3:B bit=0, Type-4:B bit=1, Type-5:A bit=1,B bit=1
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 227
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure
Specifies the length of a seizure signal.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer
Specifies the length of an answer signal.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear
Specifies the length of a clear signal.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
228 PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK
Specifies whether the PBX waits for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Meter Pulse Detection—Mode
Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses.
Value Range
No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received.
Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls.
Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses.
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Meter Pulse Detection—Bit Position
Specifies the bit position of a call charge meter pulse.
PC Programming Manual 229
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Meter Pulse Detection—Length
Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge meter pulse.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–80) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Transmit
Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
Value Range
-12 dB–3 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
230 PC Programming Manual
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Receive
Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal.
Value Range
-42 - 0 dB – -11- 0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Transmit
Specifies the output power of MFC-R2 signals sent from the DSP.
Value Range
-31–0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive
Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an
MFC-R2 signal.
Value Range
-38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB
PC Programming Manual 231
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Error Detection—Error Detection
Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Frame Error Detection—Error Rate
Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm. To enable
this setting, Frame Error Detection—Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes.
Value Range
No limit, 16
´ n (n=1–7) errors/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
232 PC Programming Manual
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2
Setting 1
ANI Service—Mode
Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode.
Value Range
None: ANI service is not activated.
Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line.
Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line.
Both calls: Sends and receives the caller’s number through the E1 line.
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ANI Service—ANI Max. digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI.
Value Range
None, 1–16
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Timer—Forward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 forward signal sent from the telephone company.
Value Range
1–30 s
PC Programming Manual 233
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Timer—Backward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the telephone company.
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Timer—Disappearance
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 disappearance signal sent from the telephone company.
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
234 PC Programming Manual
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Start
Specifies the code used to indicate the beginning of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Complete (1)–(4)
Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number.
Value Range
ANI Complete (1): 1–15
ANI Complete (2)–(4): Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Reject
Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
PC Programming Manual 235
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit
Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Timer
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Outgoing Call
Specifies the code for sending Group-ll code to the telephone company.
236 PC Programming Manual
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Incoming Call [01]–[15]
Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively.
Value Range
Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-ll Code Assignment—Group-ll ANI
Specifies the Group-ll ANI start code.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 237
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code
Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*].
Value Range
11–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[#] code
Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [#].
Value Range
11–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
238 PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2
Setting 2
Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete
Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—ANI Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1)
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
PC Programming Manual 239
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code
Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—Set up Speech Path
Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(First) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the first digit of an ANI number.
240 PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N-1) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-1)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 241
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request
Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI number.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (1)
Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
242 PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (2)
Specifies the code used in special circumstances, such as an international call, to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (3)
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when the call is disconnected by the caller.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 243
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Group-B Code Assignment—Busy
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Unallocated
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Congestion
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
244 PC Programming Manual
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is out of service.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—No Billing
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group-B Code Assignment—Collect Call Reject
Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected.
Value Range
Undefined, 1–15
PC Programming Manual 245
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Maintenance Console Location
3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
246 PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Value Range
channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
PC Programming Manual 247
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Channel Type
Selects the channel type.
Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
DR2: Digital System R2
E&M-P: Pulsed E & M
E&M-C: Continuous E & M
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
248 PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.22.1 E1 Line Service
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the E & M channel.
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.
If MFC-R2 is selected, the PBX (not the telephone company) sends a dial tone to the caller when making a trunk call using an E1 line.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
1.22.1 E1 Line Service
PC Programming Manual 249
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
E1 Receiver Type
Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line.
This should be set to MFC-R2 when receiving ANI (Automatic Number Identification) numbers from the E1 line.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2, Undefined
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.22.1 E1 Line Service
Receive Digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI/DID number when receiving a call with the
DDI/DID number.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CPC Detection Time—Out, In
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
Value Range
None, 80
´ n (n=2–75) ms
250 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E1 channel.
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
PC Programming Manual 251
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
Value Range
64
´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or
E&M-C.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
252 PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when
Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or
E&M-C.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
PC Programming Manual 253
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Wait Timer (*60s)
Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call. The line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires.
Value Range
None, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
254 PC Programming Manual
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
PC Programming Manual 255
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port
Feature Guide References
None
256 PC Programming Manual
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
The properties for the E & M card can be specified.
Interface
Selects E & M signal type.
Value Range
Continuous, Pulsed with Answer, Pulsed without Answer, Continuous No Answer
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
First Dial Timer (TIE)
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Answer Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=1–255) ms
PC Programming Manual 257
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Inter-digit Timer
Specifies the pseudo-answer time.
Value Range
3–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16
´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
258 PC Programming Manual
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
PC Programming Manual 259
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
260 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Minimum BREAK Width
Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–63) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
PC Programming Manual 261
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Feature Guide References
None
Flash—Flash Width
Specifies the maximum length of a hookswitch signal sent from an SLT that can be recognised by the PBX as a flash signal.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=3–191) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure
Selects the length of a seizure pulse.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer
Selects the length of an answer pulse.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
262 PC Programming Manual
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear
Selects the length of a clear pulse.
Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK
Enables the PBX to wait for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 263
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
264 PC Programming Manual
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type
PC Programming Manual 265
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Various settings can be programmed for each E & M channel.
To change the status of channels, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).
Value Range
Channel number
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
266 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the channel.
Value Range
Public: Use the DIL method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
PC Programming Manual 267
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Gain Adjustment
Indicates the value for hardware adjustment (fixed, reference only).
Value Range
1
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E & M line.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line.
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
268 PC Programming Manual
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
Value Range
64
´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 269
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
E&M TIE Line Type
Selects the type of the voice path for an E & M line.
Value Range
2 wires, 4 wires
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sending Caller ID to TIE
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Receiving Caller ID from TIE
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when
Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
270 PC Programming Manual
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Feature Guide References
None
Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
PC Programming Manual 271
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
272 PC Programming Manual
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection
Command
Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed.
INS
Puts the channel in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 273
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
The property for the DID card can be specified.
First Dial Timer
Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
64 + 16
´ n (n=0–11) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break
Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
60 %, 67 %
274 PC Programming Manual
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 275
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone
Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width
Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=9–20) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width
Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.
Value Range
8
´ n (n=1–5) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
276 PC Programming Manual
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Line Signal Setting—Wink Signal Width
Specifies the length of a wink signal.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=4–9) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code
Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
PC Programming Manual 277
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID End Code
Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.
Value Range
*, #, A–D
Maintenance Console Location
3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
278 PC Programming Manual
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Various settings can be programmed for each DID port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
PC Programming Manual 279
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the DID line.
Value Range
DTMF, Pulse
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the DID line.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
280 PC Programming Manual
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Feature Guide References
None
CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the line.
Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
Wink Signal Time-Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
Value Range
64
´ n (n=1–128) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Start Signal Type
Selects the type of the start signal.
Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
PC Programming Manual 281
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CPC Detection Time—Out (DID), In (DID)
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
Value Range
None, 80
´ n (n=2–75) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Sending Caller ID to CO
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent to an analogue trunk.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
282 PC Programming Manual
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Receiving Caller ID from CO
Specifies whether Caller ID information is received from an analogue trunk.
Value Range
No, Yes
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller
Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial Tone to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 283
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Feature Guide References
None
Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.
Value Range
None, 16
´ n (n=1–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s
284 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
PC Programming Manual 285
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the DID ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port
Feature Guide References
None
286 PC Programming Manual
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified.
En-bloc Dialling setting
Selects the call dialling mode.
Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—
ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
Feature Guide References
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
When using the Centralised VM feature, set this to "No".
PC Programming Manual 287
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Value Range
Yes, No
Maintenance Console Location
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
288 PC Programming Manual
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).
To change the status of ports, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
PC Programming Manual 289
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
290 PC Programming Manual
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—
Connection Command
Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed.
INS
Puts the port in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the purpose of repair.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command
Programming Manual References
3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 291
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified.
To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings.
IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the card.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the card.
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Gateway Address [Common Settings]
Displays the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs (reference only).
To change the value displayed here, click Common Setting, and set the desired value for
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
292 PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Keep Alive Time Out
Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no communications are received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the IP-PT to be unreachable, and sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes, and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so.
Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Echo Canceller Ability
Specifies the echo canceller ability time.
Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 293
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Down)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain (Up)
Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.
Value Range
-14–6 dB
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
294 PC Programming Manual
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
NLP Setting
Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality.
Value Range
Disable, Weak
Maintenance Console Location
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
PC Programming Manual 295
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—
Common Settings
IP network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS.
Gateway Address
Specifies the default gateway address of the IP network.
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Programming Manual References
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension— Gateway Address [Common Settings]
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)
Specifies the UDP port used by the IP-EXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-EXT16 card uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
Value Range
1024–65472
Maintenance Console Location
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)
Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-PT side.
This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
296 PC Programming Manual
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
For voice communications, an IP-EXT16 card uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
Value Range
1024–65472
Maintenance Console Location
3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
PC Programming Manual 297
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command.
IP-PT Registration and De-registration
An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions of the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
Preparation
Follow the steps below to prepare before registering an IP-PT.
1.
Open 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension, and confirm that the IP address and subnet mask
settings of the IP-EXT card are correct.
2.
Open 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings and set the gateway address.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1.
Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2.
Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.
3.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current IP-PT extension number and index number for programming.
4.
Programme the relevant IP-PT.
5.
Click Next.
•
If the registration is still in process, the dialogue box will show "Waiting for IP-PT to register…". Click
OK.
•
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Succeed".
If there are more IP-PTs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to terminate the registration. If not, click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1.
Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3.
Click Confirm.
•
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
•
If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration will be terminated.
4.
Click Close.
If the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
298 PC Programming Manual
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1.
Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3.
Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4.
Click Confirm.
•
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5.
Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
PC Programming Manual 299
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
This cell is only active when
Status on this screen shows Registered.
Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).
300 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.
Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
PC Programming Manual 301
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.11.4 Headset Operation
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.
Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Codec
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.
Value Range
G.711, G.729
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
Packet Sampling Time
Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
When
IP Codec on this screen is set to G.711, only 20 ms and 30 ms are available.
302 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port
PC Programming Manual 303
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified.
To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Sub-slot
Indicates the sub-slot number (reference only).
Value Range
Sub-slot number
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Feature Card Type
Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only).
Note that only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
304 PC Programming Manual
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Installation Manual References
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Status
Indicates the status of the option card in each slot (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command:
•
Click the desired cell in the column.
•
Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card has been removed from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Pre-Install: There is no card in the sub-slot, but the card type is programmed for the sub-slot.
Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot.
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Feature Guide References
None
Port Number
Indicates the port number of the mounted option card (reference only).
PC Programming Manual 305
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Status
Indicates the port status of the mounted option card (reference only).
Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card is pulled out from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Device Type
Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).
Value Range
Relay, Ringer
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
306 PC Programming Manual
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Input Signal Decision Time
Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the input and makes a sensor call.
Value Range
32
´ n (n=2–255) ms
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=1–255) s
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
SVM Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an SVM card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an
SVM card, MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual 307
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
MSG Feature
Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an
SVM card, MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
308 PC Programming Manual
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card
Command
Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed.
INS
Puts the card in service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
OUS
Takes the card out of service.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Pre-INS
Assigns the card type to a certain sub-slot (Pre-installation).
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
PC Programming Manual 309
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Installation Manual References
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Delete
Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub-slot.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
310 PC Programming Manual
3.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
3.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Option cards can be installed to and removed from the OPB3 cards installed in the PBX.
Click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards.
Option Card Type
Selects the type of option card to install to the OPB3 card.
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Installation Manual References
1.2.1 Optional Equipment
Programming Manual References
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
Slot 1–Slot 3
Selects the slot on the OPB3 card to install or remove the option card for.
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Programming Manual References
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
PC Programming Manual 311
3.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Feature Guide References
None
Card Inserted
Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card
Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card
ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card
Maintenance Console Location
3.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup
Programming Manual References
3.38 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
Feature Guide References
None
312 PC Programming Manual
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
The properties of the CTI-LINK card can be specified.
Note that the IP address information must be specified in accordance with the settings of the network that it will be used on.
IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the PBX.
Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the PBX.
Value Range
0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255)
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Gateway
Specifies the gateway address.
Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
PC Programming Manual 313
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Maintenance Port Number
Specifies a port number used to operate Maintenance Console via LAN.
Value Range
10000–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
CTI Port Number
Specifies a port number used to operate CTI via LAN. Selecting "0" disables the 3rd Party CTI feature.
Value Range
0, 10000–65535
Maintenance Console Location
3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
314 PC Programming Manual
3.42 [1-2] Portable Station
3.42 [1-2] Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 128 PSs can be registered.
Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.
PS Registration and De-registration
A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the Quick Installation
Guide for the relevant Cell Station (CS).
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1.
Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current PS extension number and index number for programming.
3.
Register the relevant PS.
For details about PS registration, refer to the Quick Installation Guide for the relevant Cell Station (CS).
4.
Click Next.
•
If the PS registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show "Waiting for portable station to register…". Click OK.
•
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Registration Succeed".
If there are more PSs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to terminate the registration.
If not, click Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".
De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
1.
Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3.
Click Confirm.
•
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Succeed".
•
If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration will be terminated.
4.
Click Close.
If the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or de-registration has been performed only on the PS.
1.
Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2.
Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
PC Programming Manual 315
3.42 [1-2] Portable Station
3.
Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4.
Click Confirm.
•
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
5.
Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".
Personal Identification Number
Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong
PBX.
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.
Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Installation Manual References
None
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Index
Indicates the PS number (reference only).
Value Range
1–128
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
316 PC Programming Manual
3.42 [1-2] Portable Station
Extension No.
Specifies the extension number of the PS.
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone (PT/SLT), and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that the PS extension number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).
Value Range
None, Registered
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 317
3.42 [1-2] Portable Station
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
318 PC Programming Manual
3.43 [1-3] Option
3.43 [1-3] Option
System options can be programmed.
It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode:
1.
Click Clear Master CS.
2.
Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No.
If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode. Master CS information will be assigned automatically when a CS is connected to the PBX. Without the Radio System ID, PSs cannot be registered.
System Wireless—System ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card
Selects the initial status of cards after installation.
Value Range
In Service, Out of Service
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 319
3.43 [1-3] Option
New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card
Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is installed for the first time.
Value Range
ISDN Standard mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Centralised VM features are supported. DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel.
T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT, and
Centralised VM features are not available in this mode.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail
320 PC Programming Manual
3.44 [1-4] Clock Priority
3.44 [1-4] Clock Priority
Slot Number
Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX.
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides.
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
1.
Assign a Clock Priority to each BRI, PRI, T1 and/or E1 card.
2.
Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without being connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network. That
PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source. All other
PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on the network to synchronise their timing.
Value Range
None, BRI4, BRI8, PPRI23, PRI30, T1, E1
Maintenance Console Location
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 321
3.44 [1-4] Clock Priority
322 PC Programming Manual
Section 4
[2] System
PC Programming Manual 323
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
The date and time of the PBX, and Summer time (daylight saving time) can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
To set the system date and time of the PBX, click 4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time
Setting
Enables Summer time.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
Start Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
324 PC Programming Manual
End Date—Year, Month, Day
Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31
Maintenance Console Location
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
PC Programming Manual 325
4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting
4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time
Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions
(e.g., PT, PS).
Date & Time
Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.
Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 01–12
Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Second: 00–59
Maintenance Console Location
4.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting
Programming Manual References
4.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
Feature Guide References
None
326 PC Programming Manual
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.
PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension number,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.5 Operator Features
BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2
Selects the audio source of BGM2.
Value Range
External BGM Port 2, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
Selects the audio source for Music on Hold.
PC Programming Manual 327
4.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
Value Range
Tone, BGM 1 (External BGM Port 1), BGM 2 (Internal 1/2 or External 2)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold, or ringback tone).
Value Range
Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
328 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.
Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled.
Value Range
0-15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval
Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=1–360) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt. This is the length of time that the called party’s extension will ring for each attempt.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=1–30) s
PC Programming Manual 329
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer
Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature is set.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
330 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Dial—Extension First Digit
Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
Dial—Extension Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
Dial—Analogue CO First Digit
Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 331
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start
Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analogue trunk calls.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
332 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break,
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time— Intercept No Answer Time
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Recall—Hold Recall
Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved.
Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Recall—Transfer Recall
Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to the Transfer
Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.
Value Range
1–240 s
PC Programming Manual 333
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Recall—Call Park Recall
Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.
Value Range
1–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Recall—Disconnect after Recall
Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the held call is disconnected.
Value Range
1–30 min
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
334 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.)
Value Range
0 (continuous)–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.8 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-free mode.
The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 335
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation
DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.
Value Range
0.0–12.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialling before the call is redirected to the operator.
336 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
Value Range
0–5 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 337
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0" enables the caller to prolong the trunk-to-trunk call without restriction.)
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
338 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.)
Value Range
0–7 min
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM.
Value Range
0–7 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 339
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Call Duration
Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=0–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone—Open Duration
Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.
Value Range
2–7 s
340 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.2 Door Open
Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated.
Value Range
1–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder—Interval Time
Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=1–120) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
PC Programming Manual 341
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=1–30) s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.
Value Range
0–60 min
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not return to the conference.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
342 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Miscellaneous
Caller ID—Waiting to receive
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual 343
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
Value Range
0–250 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.18.1 Caller ID
Extension PIN—Lock Counter
Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked. A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager. (Specifying "None" disables this counter.)
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
External Sensor—Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a sensor call.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=1–15) s
344 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.9 External Sensor
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Value Range
0–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—TIE
Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
Value Range
3–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
PC Programming Manual 345
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status.
Value Range
1–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a trunk (for example, to transfer a call) until the VPS goes on hook. If the time specified here is too short, the VPS will be unable to dial the number and make a connection.
Value Range
1–30 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24 Voice Mail Features
During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length
Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a conversation.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms
Maintenance Console Location
346 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause
Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation.
Value Range
64 + 16
´ n (n=0–15) ms
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation.
Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS before setting its status to Out of Range.
If "0" is assigned, the timer is controlled by the cell station.
PC Programming Manual 347
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Value Range
0 s, 4 s, 8 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Feature Guide References
1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
SVM—Recording Time
Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.
Value Range
1–600 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an extension are finished playing.
Value Range
1–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
348 PC Programming Manual
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Broadcasting—Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that a broadcasting call will ring. The broadcasting call will be established with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is cancelled.
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—
5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Broadcasting
PC Programming Manual 349
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
4.5 [2-4] Week Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day.
The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the
Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by
COS).
•
To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
•
To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time blocks, click Time Setting.
350 PC Programming Manual
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time
Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Hour,
Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when
1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start,
Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting is set to Enable.
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.
PC Programming Manual 351
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
2. Break—–Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute
Specifies the end time for each break period. Times can only be set when
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Maintenance Console Location
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
352 PC Programming Manual
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service
4.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting
PC Programming Manual 353
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
Holiday Table—Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—Start Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday start date.
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—Start Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday start date.
Value Range
1–31
354 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Month
Specifies the month of the holiday end date.
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Holiday Table—End Date—Day
Specifies the day of the holiday end date.
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
4.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
PC Programming Manual 355
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other PBXs in a network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.
Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 64 different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide References
None
No. of Additional Digits
Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.
Value Range
None: 0 digit
X: 1 digit
XX: 2 digits
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
356 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone.
Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
2.2.5 Operator Features
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle trunk automatically).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
PC Programming Manual 357
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Trunk Group Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
TIE Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
358 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Doorphone Call
Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
PC Programming Manual 359
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
Group Paging
Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
External BGM On / Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Guide References
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
360 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
OGM Record / Clear / Playback
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain
OGM.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Guide References
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Single CO Line Access
Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when receiving an incoming call.
This setting is not used with the KX-TDA150.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
PC Programming Manual 361
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
Group Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
TAFAS Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a trunk call notified through an external pager.
362 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Group Paging Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
PC Programming Manual 363
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions—
Remote Operation by Other Extension
Feature Guide References
1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP
Feature Guide References
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Account Code Entry
Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
364 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
PC Programming Manual 365
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held trunk number.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
366 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.2 Door Open
External Relay Access
Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
External Feature Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
ISDN Hold
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature.
PC Programming Manual 367
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN
COLR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called party’s number to the caller.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
CLIR Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the caller’s number to the called party.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
368 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber’s number) or the extension to the network.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This feature can be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 369
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)
ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting.
Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
370 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
PC Programming Manual 371
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
FWD No Answer Timer Set
Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
372 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from picking up calls to your extension).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
PC Programming Manual 373
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Paging Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.3 Walking Extension
Data Line Security Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other extensions during data transmission).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
374 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.5 Data Line Security
Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Automatic Call Waiting
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk, doorphone, or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions from joining your conversation).
PC Programming Manual 375
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
376 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Incoming Call Queue Monitor
Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature
Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to be automatically dialled.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Absent Message Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
PC Programming Manual 377
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.2 Absent Message
BGM Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on-hook.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
378 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Main—
SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Feature Guide References
1.26.2 Printing Message
Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
PC Programming Manual 379
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
Remote Extension Dial Lock On
Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.
380 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Feature Clear
Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
Extension PIN Set / Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 381
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Dial Information (CTI)
Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Broadcasting Operation
Specifies the feature number used to make a broadcasting call.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—
5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Broadcasting
Centralised BLF Monitor Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
382 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Busy Out Cancel
Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 5—
Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Simplified Voice Message Access
Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
PC Programming Manual 383
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Other PBX Extension
Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.
Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.
Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
KX-T7710
The settings of the MESSAGE button and One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.
Dial
Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each button (reference only).
Value Range
B: For MESSAGE button
A1: For One-touch button 1
A2: For One-touch button 2
A3: For One-touch button 3
A4: For One-touch button 4
A5: For One-touch button 5
A6: For One-touch button 6
A7: For One-touch button 7
A8: For One-touch button 8
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
384 PC Programming Manual
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Message Key—Phone Number
Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE button on the KX-T7710 is pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting
indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.
This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
One-touch Dial 01–08—Phone Number
Specifies the number dialled when a one-touch button on the KX-T7710 is pressed.
This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
PC Programming Manual 385
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of Calls via a Private IP Network to Public Trunks" in the Feature
Guide).
A maximum of 4080 (80: basic memory, 4000: expansion memory) Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.
Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work
Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible (does not overlap) with the main numbering plan.
Value Range
Disable: Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Enable: Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan.
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialling number.
Value Range
Basic Memory: Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Expansion Memory 1–4000: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
386 PC Programming Manual
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
4.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
PC Programming Manual 387
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Guide.
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an extension in DND mode.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Executive Busy Override
Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
388 PC Programming Manual
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.3 Intercom Call
Message Waiting Set
Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension’s conversation.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
PC Programming Manual 389
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Monitor
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—
Feature Guide References
1.8.3 Call Monitor
Automatic Callback Busy
Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call an extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as
BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override on
this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features. This can be useful, for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override.
Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)
Maintenance Console Location
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
390 PC Programming Manual
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
4.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
PC Programming Manual 391
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) level for making trunk calls in each time mode.
Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
392 PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
TRS Level on Extension Lock
Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial
Lock feature.
Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock
TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers, which overrides the TRS/Barring set for the current time mode.
Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialling
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
PC Programming Manual 393
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
CO & SMDR
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s) on 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—
Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to trunks.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
394 PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Call Forward to CO
Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Account Code Mode
Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call.
Value Range
Option, Forced
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
PC Programming Manual 395
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
CF (MSN)
Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX, on an MSN basis.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Extension Feature
The use of features related to extension operations can be programmed for each COS.
396 PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Executive Busy Override
Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
DND Override
Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
PC Programming Manual 397
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.8.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension’s conversation.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.8.3 Call Monitor
398 PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Call Pickup by DSS
Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Programming & Manager
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Executive Busy Override Deny
Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual 399
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Group Forward Set
Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Programming Mode Level
Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming.
Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming.
PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming.
PROG and PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform both personal and system programming.
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
400 PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
2.3.2 PT Programming
Manager
Specifies the authorisation to use manager features.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
2.2.6 Manager Features
Time Service Switch
Enables manual switching of time modes.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level.
PC Programming Manual 401
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
SDN Key Mode
Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.
Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Making call by COS of SDN key’s owner
Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button’s registered (owner) extension.
This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode above is set to "Standard SDN".
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
402 PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
SDN Key Assignment by PT Program
Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Optional Device & Other Extensions
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.
PC Programming Manual 403
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.17.2 Door Open
External Relay Access
Enables access to external relays.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.10 External Relay Control
Accept the Call from DISA
Enables reception of calls from DISA.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
404 PC Programming Manual
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Remote Operation by Other Extension
Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using
DISA).
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.9.5 Walking COS
Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS
Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.
Value Range
Allow, Deny
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Miscellaneous
COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
PC Programming Manual 405
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Broadcasting Operation
Enables making broadcasting calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—
4.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Broadcasting
Accept a collect call (for Brazil)
Enables accepting collect calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
406 PC Programming Manual
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.
Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64
Specifies the available trunk groups.
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
PC Programming Manual 407
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
64
COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–
Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.
Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block
Maintenance Console Location
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
408 PC Programming Manual
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option1, Option2
Maintenance Console Location
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
PC Programming Manual 409
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from
Doorphone
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
410 PC Programming Manual
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Guide.
Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
None
Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
None
Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.
PC Programming Manual 411
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
None
Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
None
External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor.
Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2
Maintenance Console Location
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
412 PC Programming Manual
Feature Guide References
None
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
PC Programming Manual 413
4.17 [2-9] System Options
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Various system settings can be programmed.
Option 1
PT LCD—Date Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.
Value Range
Date-Month, Month-Date
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PT LCD—Time Display
Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions. The time display format assigned here applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature.
Value Range
12H, 24H
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.4 Timed Reminder
PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the displays of extensions while being entered.
Value Range
Hide, Display
414 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.20.3 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.
Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
4.17 [2-9] System Options
PC Programming Manual 415
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.20.3 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.)
Value Range
FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the programming mode for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
Specifies whether extensions can receive paging when in DND mode.
Value Range
Do Not Page, Page
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T75xx/T76xx
Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7600 or KX-DT300 series telephones and IP-PTs.
416 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through the hands-free speaker.
Enable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through both the hands-free speaker and the handset.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor
PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call.
Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature
Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.3 Privacy Release
PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed
Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.
This setting is not used with the KX-TDA150.
Value Range
Normal, High Speed
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 417
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk.
Value Range
No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button is pressed while having a conversation.
418 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
Disable (Disconnect), Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without
Announcement feature.
Value Range
Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
Option 2
Extension Clear—Call Waiting
Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 419
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.
Value Range
Clear, Do not clear
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear
CODEC—System CODEC
Selects the codec type for DPTs and PSs.
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
420 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CODEC—Network CODEC
Selects the codec type for ISDN or T1/E1 lines.
Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line; if used as the end code, "#" will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
PC Programming Manual 421
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Redial—Automatic Redial for Analogue CO
Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue CO line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters— Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
422 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Redial—Call Log by Redial key
Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—
Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
PC Programming Manual 423
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Automatic Time Adjustment—by ISDN & Caller ID (FSK)
Enables the PBX to adjust its clock every day according to the time information that the network provides with the first call after 3:05 AM.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.3.5 Automatic Setup
Option 3
Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in voice-calling mode.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.1 Doorphone Call
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
424 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
1.15.1 Paging
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from
Doorphone
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 425
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Feature Guide References
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds a call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
426 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.1 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.29.1 Dial Tone
PC Programming Manual 427
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling.
Value Range
Type A, Type B
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
Feature Guide References
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1.29.1 Dial Tone
Echo Cancel—Conference
Enables the use of the ECHO card for conference calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.14.1.2 Conference
Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO
Enables the use of the ECHO card for trunk-to-trunk calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
428 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line
Enables the use of the ECHO card for extension-to-analogue trunk calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line
Enables the use of the ECHO card for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
If set to "Enable", the echo canceller card is used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
If set to "Disable", the echo canceller card is not used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option 4
DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.
PC Programming Manual 429
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
ON or Flash, OFF
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
1.20.3 LED Indication
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable
this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash.
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution group.
To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or
Flash.
Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.
Maintenance Console Location
430 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call
Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold.
Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation
Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.
Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature, it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.)
Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in
Recall—Transfer Recall in 4.4 [2-3]
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.12.1 Call Transfer
PC Programming Manual 431
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using the
Hands-free Answerback feature.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held Party)
Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular Phone
Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the virtual PS’s forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call received at an ICD Group containing a virtual PS.
This setting only applies to calls automatically forwarded to public trunk lines using the virtual PS feature.
Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling party is sent.
432 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
1.30.6 Network ICD Group
Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller
ID Digits
Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional SD Card
Required)
Enables extensions at PBXs connected in a network to have the same extension numbering scheme and make
TIE line calls to each other. For example, extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2. The user of extension 1 dials 102 and the dialled number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line and connected to extension 102.
If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 433
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
Feature Guide References
1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
434 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Option 5
SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "1.13.1 Call Hold" in the Feature Guide.
Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.1 Call Hold
SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern
Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs.
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call
Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 435
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO
Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing that trunk from being used.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
ISDN Voice Path Connection—Connect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN
Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the telephone company.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension.
436 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay On,
External BGM, Paging
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN
Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.
Value Range
Mode1: Disable
Mode2: Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Option 6 (CTI)
1st Party CTI—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call
Control CTI.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 437
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
1st Party CTI—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
1st Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR (Call Detail Recording) is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
438 PC Programming Manual
4.17 [2-9] System Options
3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third Party Call
Control CTI.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer
Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for Third Party
Call Control CTI.
Value Range
0–60 s
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 439
4.17 [2-9] System Options
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter
Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically.
Value Range
0–10
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
CTI Multi PBX Control—PBX Name
Specifies the name of the PBX, for network programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CTI Multi PBX Control—USB Serial Number
Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX’s USB data transfers, used when multiple PBXs are connected via USB to one PC (for example, for CTI).
440 PC Programming Manual
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CTI Make Call—SLT Ring
Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
4.17 [2-9] System Options
PC Programming Manual 441
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.
Extension Caller ID Modulation Type
Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Signal Bits
Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=3–40) bits
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Mark Signal Bits
Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=3–40) bits
442 PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Wait Time
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
64
´ n (n=5–35) ms
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Caller ID Signal Type
Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference only).
Value Range
FSK
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual 443
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID
Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Name to Extension
Enables the PBX to send the caller’s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
444 PC Programming Manual
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension
Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
FSK Transmission Level
Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation.
Value Range
-14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 dB, 0 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual 445
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.
Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1)
Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2)
Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 2.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT.
Value Range
-15dB, -12dB, -9dB, -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB
446 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1)
Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1.
Value Range
-11–11 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2)
Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2.
Value Range
-11–11 dB
Maintenance Console Location
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)
4.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
PC Programming Manual 447
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
4.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card
Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.
Up Gain (To PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Down Gain (From PBX)
Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.
Value Range
-15–15 dB
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
448 PC Programming Manual
Section 5
[3] Group
PC Programming Manual 449
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "2.2.2 Group" in the Feature Guide.
Main
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line
Service.
If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of
"7" assigned for all relevant time modes in 4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
450 PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Line Hunting Order
Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks.
Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Value Range
None, 1-60 min
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
Specifies the length of time that an extension-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.
Value Range
None, 1-60 min
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
PC Programming Manual 451
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Caller ID Modification Table
Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).
Value Range
1–4
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Dialling Plan Table
Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling.
Value Range
1–4
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
452 PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Tone Detection
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
DISA Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
PC Programming Manual 453
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
Feature Guide References
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.
454 PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Host PBX Access Code
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
PC Programming Manual 455
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Host PBX Access Code 1–10
Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Collect Call Reject (For Brazil)
Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode
Enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls. This setting is only for users in Brazil.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
456 PC Programming Manual
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time
Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in Brazil.
Value Range
500 ms, 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Flashing Time
Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in
Brazil.
Value Range
1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 457
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.
Trunk Group No. & Name
Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level.
Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.
Value Range
Trunk Group No. 1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
458 PC Programming Manual
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.
Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller’s name can be shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4
Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long Distance
Code settings to the modified number.
Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)
Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller’s number.
Value Range
Max. 6 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be removed from the beginning of the incoming caller’s number.
Value Range
0–9
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
PC Programming Manual 459
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is applied to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
caller’s number is not modified.
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as an international
call. The value specified here must be larger than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National).
Value Range
1–31
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
460 PC Programming Manual
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National)
Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national
call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Value Range
0–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number (for International)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number (for National)
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds
Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) but does not exceed
PC Programming Manual 461
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Value Range
Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan is
International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification
Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used for sending to the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the Modification
Table list.
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller’s number for each type of network numbering plan.
Value Range
0–9
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits for each type of network numbering plan.
462 PC Programming Manual
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—
Called Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual 463
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the caller’s voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the PBX mutes the caller’s voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the analogue trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to programme from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.
Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0-9, *, and #])
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Removed Number of Digits
Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed.
Value Range
0–15
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
464 PC Programming Manual
Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan
PC Programming Manual 465
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.
Select Auto Assigning Table
Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.
Value Range
Type A: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type B: 1:N11, 2:NNX XXXX, 3:1NPX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type C: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NNX XXXX, 4:1NPX NXX XXXX, 5-50: Not stored
Type D: 1-47: Not stored, 48:N11, 49:NXX XXXX, 50:1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E: 1:N11, 2:NXX NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Maintenance Console Location
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
466 PC Programming Manual
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group.
Trunk Group Name
Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Rate
Specifies the call charge rate.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in
Digits After Decimal Point in 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge.
Value Range
0–9999999
Maintenance Console Location
5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
PC Programming Manual 467
5.7 [3-2] User Group
5.7 [3-2] User Group
Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups. A maximum of 32 tenants can be programmed.
User Group Name
Specifies the name of the extension user group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service
468 PC Programming Manual
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 call pickup groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
User Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
Pickup Group—1st–8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.
Value Range
None, 01–64
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
PC Programming Manual 469
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.
Call Pickup Group Name
Specifies the name of the call pickup group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
User Group 1–32
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group
470 PC Programming Manual
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to paging groups easily, click All Setting.
User Group Name
Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
Paging Group—1st–8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging groups, click All Setting.
Value Range
None, 01–32
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
PC Programming Manual 471
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Specifies the name of the paging group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
User Group 1–32
Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
472 PC Programming Manual
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.
Paging Group Name
Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
External Pager 1
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
External Pager 2
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.
Value Range
ON (blue), OFF
PC Programming Manual 473
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Maintenance Console Location
5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group
474 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.
Extension List View). To assign extensions to ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member
List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY" in the Feature Guide.
Main
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 475
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Call Waiting Distribution
Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
All, Distribution
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
476 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
No Ring, Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Music On Hold
Feature Guide References
1.13.4 Music on Hold
2.2.3 Tenant Service
PC Programming Manual 477
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
4.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
Feature Guide References
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
CLIP on ICD Group Button
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Overflow Queuing Busy
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
478 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
PC Programming Manual 479
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity
Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.
Value Range
None, 1–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Overflow No Answer
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
480 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual
Queue Redirection in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Overflow Time
Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.
Value Range
None, 10
´ n (n=1–125) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
PC Programming Manual 481
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the
Hurry-up button.
Value Range
None, 1–30
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Queuing Time Table
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
482 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode.
Value Range
None, Table 1–Table 64
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing
Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.
Value Range
Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Miscellaneous
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
PC Programming Manual 483
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Extension No Answer Redirection Time
Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.
Value Range
None, 10
´ n (n=1–15) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
484 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
None, 1–15
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Maximum No. of Busy Extension
Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max.: Call arrives at an idle extension.
1–32 : Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned number.
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Last Extension Log-out
Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
PC Programming Manual 485
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
VIP Call Mode
Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.5 VIP Call
Supervisor Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group’s supervisor. The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The supervisor extension need not belong to the group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature
486 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems
(VPS) with DTMF Integration.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Group Log / Group FWD
To set extension numbers easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
PC Programming Manual 487
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory.
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Group FWD Call from CO—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
488 PC Programming Manual
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Group FWD Call from CO—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Call from Extension—Destination
Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 489
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
490 PC Programming Manual
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and network ICD groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "1.25.6 Virtual PS" in the Feature
Guide). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone) can act as a member of an
ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No. list.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, PS, and
T1-OPX extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
PC Programming Manual 491
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)
Value Range
Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept another call.
This timer is used when " Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Value Range
10
´ n (n=0–300) s
Maintenance Console Location
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
492 PC Programming Manual
5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled.
A maximum of 64 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.
Value Range
None: Redirects the call to the next sequence
Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow destination when there is no answer
Disconnect: Disconnects the line
Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different sequence
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM
Wait 5
´ n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time; if not preceded by an OGM, sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time.
Maintenance Console Location
5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
PC Programming Manual 493
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.
Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call
Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Options—ICD Group Key Mode
Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button mode.
When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group. The extension user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.
Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Activation Key Required)
Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD).
494 PC Programming Manual
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used.
If Extension is selected here,
Wrap-up Timer on 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is selected, Wrap-up Timer on
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension
Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.
Maintenance Console Location
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
PC Programming Manual 495
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).
Hunting Group Name
Specifies the name of the hunting group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Hunting Type
Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group.
Value Range
Circular: Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed
Terminated: Terminates at the last extension
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
2.2.2 Group
496 PC Programming Manual
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
PC Programming Manual 497
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting
Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in
Extension Number or click Extension
Copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in
(reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
Feature Guide References
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
498 PC Programming Manual
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX.
The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.
A maximum of 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed.
Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DPT) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.)
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Intercept to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PC Programming Manual 499
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Transfer Recall to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed time period; (2) when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension. When the
VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
500 PC Programming Manual
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Floating Extension No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DPT) group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PC Programming Manual 501
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member
List
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
VM Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only).
502 PC Programming Manual
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Value Range
1, 2
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
VM Port No.
Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only).
Value Range
1–12
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
PC Programming Manual 503
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
504 PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the
PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 VM
(DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see "1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group" and
"1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration" in the Feature Guide.
VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialled number is invalid.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
PC Programming Manual 505
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
506 PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
PC Programming Manual 507
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Command—Recording Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded, intercepted, or transferred to the VPS, so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox.
508 PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service Mode.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 509
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Feature Guide References
None
VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—DTMF Length for VM
Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—Inter-digit Time
Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.
Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
510 PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has answered a call.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal
Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the
VPS has finished dialling.
Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.)
PC Programming Manual 511
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence
Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.
Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
512 PC Programming Manual
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Others—Mailbox for Extension
Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—
Feature Guide References
None
Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control
Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the VPS.
Value Range
By PBX, By VM
Maintenance Console Location
5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 513
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
Floating Ext. No.
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM
(DTMF) group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Type
Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls.
Value Range
AA, VM
514 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
PC Programming Manual 515
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—
Member List
Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.
Extension Number of the SLT Port Connected to VM
Specifies the extension number assigned to the SLT port that is connected to the VPS.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
516 PC Programming Manual
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 128 PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.
Floating Extension Number
Specifies the floating extension number of the PS ring group.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
Group Name
Specifies the name of the PS ring group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring
group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display
Specifies the information of the incoming trunk call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong to the
PS ring group. If the caller’s name or called party’s name is not recognised, the telephone number will be shown.
PC Programming Manual 517
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group
Value Range
Caller ID, Called Number
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
518 PC Programming Manual
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 128 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the
PS Ring Group Number list.
OK.
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits
Maintenance Console Location
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.25.2 PS Ring Group
PC Programming Manual 519
5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
A broadcasting group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a broadcasting call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple broadcasting groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 broadcasting groups. To assign members to a group, click Member
List.
Broadcasting Group—Name
Specifies the name of the broadcasting group.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Broadcasting
520 PC Programming Manual
5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List
5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each broadcasting group. Select the group to programme from the
Broadcasting Group Number list.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
Dial Number
Specifies the destination number of each member of the broadcasting group.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Broadcasting
Extension Name
only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.16.1 Broadcasting
PC Programming Manual 521
5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List
522 PC Programming Manual
Section 6
[4] Extension
PC Programming Manual 523
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to
extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 5.7 [3-2] User Group for more details.
Note
The extension information for the DLC4 port on the DMPR card is shown at the bottom of the Extension
Settings list.
Main
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
524 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).
Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (MCSLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (BRI/PRI)
IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (IP-EXT)
PC Programming Manual 525
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).
Value Range
DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
ISDN-Ext: ISDN telephone is connected.
No Connection: No telephone is connected.
CS: CS is connected.
CS-M: High-density CS is connected with its master port.
CS-S1–3: High-density CS is connected with its slave port.
IP-EXT: IP-PT is connected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Value Range
1–32
526 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a.
Keeping PINs secret.
b.
Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0-9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 527
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Intercept Destination
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
528 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 529
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
530 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 531
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
532 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
PC Programming Manual 533
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in
Subscriber Number in 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI
Port or 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
534 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Option 1
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
PC Programming Manual 535
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
536 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Wireless XDP
Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting.
Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first.
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension.
Value Range
1–8
PC Programming Manual 537
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the extension’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF
Integration.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
538 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
ARS Itemised Code
Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Option 2
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 539
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
540 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
W-OHCA: Voice from the handset
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.8.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls via an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Pickup Dial Set
Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in
Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Value Range
Off, On
PC Programming Manual 541
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Pickup Dial No.
Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Data Mode
Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.5 Data Line Security
542 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Option 3
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual 543
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
544 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each extension.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.2 Absent Message
Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in
Digits After Decimal Point in 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge.
Value Range
0–9999999
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 545
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.9.2 Budget Management
Intercom Call by Voice
Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.
Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.3 Intercom Call
Option 4
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
546 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 547
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-36: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-36: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
548 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension user answers a call that was being monitored.
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
LCS Answer Mode
Specifies whether the extension’s mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode.
Value Range
Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker
Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone
PC Programming Manual 549
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
550 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.
Value Range
Language1–Language5
PC Programming Manual 551
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display.
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
552 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Key Pad Tone
Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Automatic Answer for CO Call
Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective when
Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
Option 6
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 553
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
554 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Forced Automatic Answer
Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch
Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 555
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
ICM Tone
Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/
KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Display Lock / SVM Lock
Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display (i.e., specifies whether other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the extension).
Value Range
Unlock, Lock
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
556 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Paging Deny
Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.15.1 Paging
Option 7
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 557
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
558 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 559
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension’s
Outgoing Call Log memory.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension’s telephone type as follows:
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
560 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Option 8
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual 561
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
562 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Extension Caller ID Sending
Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a queue is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing), some SLTs require a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call’s Caller ID information.
Value Range
0–15 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.1 Caller ID
SLT MW Mode
Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port.
Value Range
Disable, MW-Lamp
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 563
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.1 Message Waiting
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.16 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Option 9
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
564 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
PC Programming Manual 565
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
FWD / DND Reference
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD and DND
settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND.
Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
566 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1.
Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2.
Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.
PC Programming Manual 567
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
FWD Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
568 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 569
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
570 PC Programming Manual
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD No Answer Time
Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded (reference only).
Value Range
0–120 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PC Programming Manual 571
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Value Range
Wired extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extensions.
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
572 PC Programming Manual
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Value Range
0–5
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 573
6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
574 PC Programming Manual
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Call from CO—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Call from CO—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from CO—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
PC Programming Manual 575
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Call from CO—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from CO—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
576 PC Programming Manual
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Call from Extension—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for intercom calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
PC Programming Manual 577
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Call from Extension—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from Extension—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD No Answer Timer
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded.
Value Range
0–120 s
578 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
PC Programming Manual 579
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
The available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets of 20. Select the desired set from the Personal Speed
Dialling No. list.
Speed Dialling Name
Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory shown on the extension’s display.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Dialling Number
Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
580 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 36 flexible buttons can be customised for each extension. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template and attached to your extension for quick reference. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number /
Name list.
To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.
To print the flexible button settings of an extension, click Key Label Print.
The key label settings related to display - Label, Color of Font, Color of Background, Font Size, and Telephone
Type - can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note that it is necessary to save these settings separately from system data.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Note
The extension information for the DLC4 port on the DMPR card is shown at the bottom of the Extension
Number / Name list.
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the trunk to be accessed.
Value Range
1–128
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
PC Programming Manual 581
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
582 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 583
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
584 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own messages only.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 585
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
586 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its own call log information.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
PC Programming Manual 587
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the extension’s mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
588 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
PC Programming Manual 589
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling
Dial (for ISDN Service)
Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
specified here.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
590 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
Specifies the ring tone type.
Value Range
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/
KX-NT321): 1–30
KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Value Range
0–99
PC Programming Manual 591
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible buttons, according to the telephone you are using. Click a flexible button to display a Change—Flexible Button 01–36 screen and edit the button’s settings.
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type
592 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Feature Guide References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
PC Programming Manual 593
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
594 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing
Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing
Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Optional Parameter (Ringing
Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Guide References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Feature Guide References
None
Label
Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Color of Font
Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
PC Programming Manual 595
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Value Range
Any colour
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Color of Background
Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
Value Range
Any colour
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Font Size
Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button.
Value Range
4–15
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
596 PC Programming Manual
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
Telephone Type
Telephone Type
Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template.
Value Range
T7633 / T7636, T7625 / T7630 / NT136, T7665 / NT265 / NT321, T7667, NT343 / NT346 / DT346 / DT343 /
DT333, Other
Maintenance Console Location
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 597
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
598 PC Programming Manual
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the
Extension Number / Name list.
The settings on this screen are not used with the KX-TDA150.
Type
Specifies whether to store a dialling number for the one-touch access.
Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons
Dial
Specifies the number to be dialled.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons
PC Programming Manual 599
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to cancel data transmission.
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
600 PC Programming Manual
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice
Message
When an ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each extension.
This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)" in the Feature Guide.
Note
The extension information for the DLC4 port on the DMPR card is shown at the bottom of the Simplified
Voice Message list.
Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).
Value Range
Slot number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).
Value Range
Port number
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 601
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—
Feature Guide References
None
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which ESVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific ESVM card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block. If two ESVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.
Value Range
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
602 PC Programming Manual
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Maximum SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 603
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 128 PSs can be programmed.
Main
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Property
Indicates the property (reference only).
604 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Portable Station
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.
Value Range
1–32
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service
COS
Specifies the COS of the PS.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
PC Programming Manual 605
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a.
Keeping PINs secret.
b.
Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c.
Changing PINs frequently.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Intercept Destination
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
606 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and
Intercept Routing–DND.
Note that, Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed using
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
PC Programming Manual 607
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept No Answer Time
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
608 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.
Value Range
0–240 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day,
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
ISDN CLIP
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 609
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party’s telephone.
Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in
Subscriber Number in 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI
Port or 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting—
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP—
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
610 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller’s telephone display when answering a call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Option 1
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 611
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Ring Pattern Table
Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
4.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Programmed Mailbox No.
Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.
612 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transfer Recall Destination
Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.12.1 Call Transfer
ARS Itemised Code
Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes.
Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
PC Programming Manual 613
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Option 2
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.
Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
614 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Pickup Dial Set
Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in
Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled
automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
PC Programming Manual 615
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Pickup Dial No.
Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Option 3
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
616 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Call Pickup Deny
Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Executive Override Deny
Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.
Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override
Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each PS.
PC Programming Manual 617
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.19.2 Absent Message
Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in
Digits After Decimal Point in 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge.
Value Range
0–9999999
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.9.2 Budget Management
Option 4
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
618 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Outgoing Preferred Line
Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.
Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing
PC Programming Manual 619
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Incoming Preferred Line
Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.
Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
LCS Recording Mode
Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored.
Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record
620 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Option 5
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 621
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.
Value Range
Language1–Language5
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Incoming Call Display
Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS’s display.
Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
622 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.20.4 Display Information
Option 6
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
SVM Lock
Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions.
Value Range
Lock, Unlock
PC Programming Manual 623
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Flexible Button Programming Mode
Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.
Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling
Option 7
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
624 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Character Input Mode
Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Flash Mode during CO Conversation
Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.
Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
PC Programming Manual 625
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory.
Value Range
0–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
Outgoing Call Log Memory
Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS’s Outgoing Call Log memory.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS.
626 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Option 8
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
PC Programming Manual 627
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
None
Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)
Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Value Range
Disable, Enable
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 5.16 [3-5-3]
Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
Value Range
0–3000 s
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List—
5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Option 9
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
628 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
PDN Delayed Ringing
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons).
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 629
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
FWD / DND Reference
Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings
can be programmed separately for each PS in 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND.
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
FWD Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
630 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Set for Call from CO
Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD Mode for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
PC Programming Manual 631
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from CO
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
DND Set for Call from Extension
Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Off, On
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
632 PC Programming Manual
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
FWD Mode for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD Destination for Call from Extension
Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD No Answer Time
Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded (reference only).
Value Range
0–120 s
PC Programming Manual 633
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Maintenance Console Location
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Programming Manual References
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
634 PC Programming Manual
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.
Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)
Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.
Value Range
PS extension number
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Location Entry—Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions.
Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as part of the
CLIP number.
PC Programming Manual 635
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Value Range
0–4
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Maintenance Console Location
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
636 PC Programming Manual
6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
PC Programming Manual 637
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
Call from CO—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Call from CO—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from CO—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
638 PC Programming Manual
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Call from CO—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from CO—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
PC Programming Manual 639
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Call from Extension—Present Button Status
Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.
Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY
Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability
Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
640 PC Programming Manual
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Call from Extension—FWD Mode
Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.
Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Call from Extension—FWD Destination
Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
FWD No Answer Time
Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded.
Value Range
0–120 s
PC Programming Manual 641
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Maintenance Console Location
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
642 PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12 flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time
Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time Service - Automatic/Manual,
Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN, SDN
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the trunk to be accessed.
Value Range
1–128
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
PC Programming Manual 643
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
644 PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS.
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
PC Programming Manual 645
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on
4.17 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable".
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
4.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—
System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
646 PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages only.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
PC Programming Manual 647
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
648 PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the PS’s mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
PC Programming Manual 649
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
650 PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Dial (for One-touch)
Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling
Dial (for ISDN Service)
Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.
Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 651
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol
Dial (for NDSS)
Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
specified here.
Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
Value Range
0–99
652 PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch
Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name
Type
This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 653
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Extension Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type—
Feature Guide References
None
Dial
This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
654 PC Programming Manual
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 1
This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Parameter Selection (for
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Feature Guide References
None
Parameter 2
This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
PC Programming Manual 655
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
Mailbox Number
This parameter is equivalent to Ext No. of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen.
Maintenance Console Location
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—
Feature Guide References
None
656 PC Programming Manual
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—
Flexible button data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.
Destination Extension Line
Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
When selecting multiple extensions, note that if the source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.
Maintenance Console Location
6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
Programming Manual References
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 657
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF, to cancel data transmission.
Value Range
OFF, ON
Maintenance Console Location
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)
658 PC Programming Manual
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice
Message
When an ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each PS.
This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)" in the Feature Guide.
Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
None
Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).
Value Range
Max. 20 characters
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— Extension Name
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 659
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Simplified Voice Message
Selects which ESVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific ESVM card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block. If two ESVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.
Value Range
None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B)
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
Maximum of SVM Log
Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension.
Value Range
1–100
Maintenance Console Location
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
660 PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 DSS Consoles can be programmed.
DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 3.4 [1-1]
Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
Each flexible DSS button can be customised to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible DSS buttons can be customised for each DSS Console. The settings can then be printed out as a key label template and attached to your DSS Console for quick reference. Select the desired DSS Console from the DSS Console
No. list.
To copy the flexible DSS button settings from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
To print the flexible DSS button settings, click Key Label Print.
The key label settings related to display - Label, Color of Font, Color of Background, Font Size, and DSS Type
- can be saved for future use. Select an action from the Key Label File drop-down list. Note that it is necessary to save these settings separately from system data.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.
Pair Extension
Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console.
Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console, they must be deleted before this setting can be changed.
Value Range
None, Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Display Option—Key Setting
Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button.
Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/DND
(Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up,
Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Cleaned Up, Two-way
Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, SDN
PC Programming Manual 661
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy
Feature Guide References
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons
Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
Specifies the trunk to be accessed.
Value Range
1–128
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.
Value Range
1–64
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
662 PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.
Value Range
Automatic, Specific
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.13.2 Call Park
Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from.
Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
Selects which time modes are switched manually.
Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night
Maintenance Console Location
PC Programming Manual 663
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.
Value Range
1–7
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Value Range
1–8
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
2.2.4 Time Service
Parameter Selection (for SDN)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
664 PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)
Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
PC Programming Manual 665
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)
Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
666 PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
Specifies the paired extension’s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the paired extension will display its own call log information.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
PC Programming Manual 667
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
None
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the paired extension’s mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
668 PC Programming Manual
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Maintenance Console Location
Programming Manual References
None
Feature Guide References
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here